Mercury 1996 Cougar Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Mercury Mercury-1996-Mercury-Cougar-Owners-Manual-818107 mercury-1996-mercury-cougar-owners-manual-818107 mercury pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 323 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1
Introductory Information
*[IN00300( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You
*[IN00500( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles
*[IN00600( ALL)04/95] Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the
quality of our products and services must be
our number one priority.
*[IN00700( ALL)04/95] You are the focus of everything we do. Our
work must be done with you in mind,
providing better products and services than
our competition.
*[IN00750( ALL)04/95] Continuous improvement is essential to our
success. We must strive for excellence in
everything we do: in our products — in their
safety and value — and in our services, our
human relations, our competitiveness, and
our profitability.
*[IN00800( ALL)04/95] Employee involvement is our way of life.
We are a team. We must treat one another
with trust and respect.
*[IN00900( ALL)04/95] Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We
must maintain mutually beneficial
relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our
other business associates.
*[IN01000( ALL)04/95] Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct
worldwide must be pursued in a manner that
is socially responsible and commands respect
for its integrity and for its positive
contributions to society.
File:rcinc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:59 1995
2
*[IN01100( ALL)04/95] Things to Know About Using
This Guide
*[IN01200( ALL)04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new
vehicle. This guide has information about the
equipment and the options for your new vehicle.
You may not have bought all of the options
available to you. If you do not know which
information applies to your vehicle, talk to your
dealer.
*[IN01300( ALL)04/95] This guide describes equipment and gives
specifications for equipment that was in effect
when this guide was approved for printing. Ford
may discontinue models or change specifications
or design without any notice and without
incurring obligation.
*[IN01400( ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS
*[IN01420( ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information about
the subject matter you are referencing.
*[IN01440( ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful
in those areas where carelessness can cause
damage to your vehicle or personal injury to
yourself, your passengers or other people. Please
read all WARNINGS carefully.
*[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
*[IN01500( ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide
*[IN01600( ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you will
probably return to it when you have a specific
question or need additional information. To help
you find specific information quickly, you can
use the Quick Index or the Index.
File:rcinc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:59 1995
3
*[IN01700( ALL)05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book
provides a page number following each item
which indicates where detailed information can
be found.
*[IN01900( ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book
and search in the alphabetical listing for the
word that best describes the information you
need. If the word you chose is not listed, think
of other related words and look them up. We
have designed the Index so that you can find
information under a technical term.
%*[IN02000( ALL)04/95] Canadian Owners — French Version
*[IN02100( ALL)04/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from your
dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
*[IN02400( ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and
Record Booklet
*[IN02500( ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists
the services that are most important for keeping
your vehicle in good condition. A record log is
also provided to help you keep track of all
services performed.
%*[IN02600( ALL)01/95] About the Warranties
[IN02700( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is covered by three types of
warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended
Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions
Warranties.
%*[IN03100( ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully
to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and
your basic rights and responsibilities.
File:rcinc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:59 1995
4
*[IN03250( ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you
can get a new one free of charge. Contact any
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the
addresses and phone numbers on the first page
of this owner guide.
%*[IN04000( ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan
*[IN04100( ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can
buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your
vehicle. This optional contract provides service
protection for a longer period of time than the
basic warranty that comes with your vehicle.
*[IN04200( ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you
buy your vehicle. However, your option to
purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs
out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your
dealer for more details about the Ford Extended
Service Plan.
*[IN04250( ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not
take advantage of the Ford Extended Service
Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be
eligible. See your dealer for the details.
%*[IN06000( ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In
*[IN06100( ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or
break-in period during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in
period, you need to pay careful attention to how
you drive your vehicle.
%*[IN06300( ALL)01/95] Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle
has new brake linings, you should take these
steps:
*[IN06400( ALL)01/95] Watch traffic carefully so that you can
anticipate when to stop.
*[IN06500( ALL)01/95] Begin braking well in advance.
*[IN06600( ALL)01/95] Apply the brakes gradually.
File:rcinc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:59 1995
5
*[IN06700( ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake linings
lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or
1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.
%*[IN06800( ALL)01/95] Use only the type of engine oil that Ford
recommends. See Engine oil recommendations
in the Index. Do not use special “break-in”
oils.
*[IN07000( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic
Powertrain Control Module that limits engine
and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to
promote durability.
%*[IN07100( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
*[IN07130( ALL)05/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage
the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your
vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.
*[IN07160( ALL)05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is
exposed to chemical industrial fallout.
*[IN07190( MVBCG )05/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not
related to a defect in paint materials or
workmanship and therefore is not covered by
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual
improvement in customer satisfaction is a high
priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its
dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by
environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000
miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes
first. Customers may be required to bring their
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford
representative.
File:rcinc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:59 1995
6
%*[IN07200( ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle
*[IN07300( ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the
underside, with a mild detergent.
*[IN07400( ALL)04/95] DO NOT:
*[IN07500( ALL)04/95] Wash your vehicle with hot water
*[IN07600( ALL)04/95] Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct
sunlight
*[IN07700( ALL)04/95] Wash your vehicle while the body is hot
*[IN08100( ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits
and protect the finish.
%*[IN08200( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts
*[IN08300( ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild
detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.
%*[IN08400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts
*[IN08500( ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are
plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if
necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine
cleaning.
*[IN08600( ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents
or petroleum-based cleaners.
%*[IN08700( ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove
oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil
remover. If rustproofing is not removed from
plastic and rubber parts, it can cause
deterioration.
File:rcinc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:59 1995
7
Safety Restraints
%*[SR00500( ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information
*[SR00600( ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and
your passengers in case of a collision. In most
states and in Canada the law requires their use.
*[SR00800( ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:
*[SR00900( ALL)01/95] the seatback is upright
*[SR01000( ALL)01/95] the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)
*[SR01100( ALL)01/95] the lap belt is snug and low on the hips
*[SR01200( ALL)01/95] the shoulder belt is snug against the chest
*[SR01300( ALL)01/95] the knees are straight forward
*[SR02100( ALL)05/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,
a warning light may come on and a chime may
sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in
the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.
*[SR02500( ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter for
directions on how to properly use these safety
belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this
chapter for special instructions about using
safety belts for children.
%*[SR02600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Make sure that you and your passengers
wear safety belts. Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
8
*[SR02700( ALL)03/95] RWARNING
Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. Never swing it around the neck over
the inside shoulder. Never use a single
belt for more than one person or across
more than one seating position. Each
seating position in your vehicle has a
specific safety belt assembly which is
made up of one buckle and one tongue
that are designed to be used as a pair.
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision.
*[SR02801( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by a qualified technician
after any collision. Safety belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
*[SR02901( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
*[SR03001( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
*[SR03200( ALL)05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to
lessen the risk of the door coming open in a
collision.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
9
[SR03700( ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder
Belts
*[SR03800( ALL)01/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination
lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, corner hard or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt
locks and helps reduce your forward movement.
*[SR04100( ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door
and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position
that suits you best.
[SR04400( ALL)06/93] To fasten the belt, pull the lap/shoulder belt
from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of
the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure
the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle
until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make
sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
*[SR04550( BCGV)01/95]
quarter page art:0010018-B
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
10
[SR04600( BCGV)03/95]
one third page art:0010502-A
Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt
*[SR04675( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
Important Safety Belt Information at
the beginning of this chapter.
% [SR04677( BC )05/95] Safety Belts for the Front Passenger
Outboard Seating Positions
[SR04680( BC )03/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for
front seat passengers and a locking “cinch
tongue” for rear outboard passengers.
*[SR04682( ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two
ways:
*[SR04683( ALL)03/95]
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
[SR04684( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will allow the occupant freedom of
movement, locking tight only on hard braking,
hard cornering or impacts of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also
be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
%*[SR04685( ALL)04/95]
Automatic locking mode
[SR04686( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will be automatically locked and remain
locked when the combination lap/shoulder
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
11
safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the
occupant freedom of movement. This mode
provides the following:
[SR04687( ALL)03/95] A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.
[SR04688( ALL)03/95] Child seat or infant carrier installation
restraint.
*[SR04689( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never install a rear-facing child seat or
infant carrier in the right front passenger
seat.
*[SR04690( ALL)03/95] This mode must be used when installing a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear
outboard seats where dual locking retractors are
provided.
*[SR04691( ALL)04/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency
locking mode to the automatic locking mode,
perform the following steps:
*[SR04692( ALL)03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.
*[SR04693( ALL)03/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted, and when allowed to retract, a
clicking sound will be heard. At this time,
the belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode).
*[SR04694( ALL)05/95] 3. A clicking sound will contnue to be heard as
the belt is allowed to retract.
[SR04695( ALL)03/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder
belt is unbuckled and allowed to
retract completely, the retractor will
switch back to the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode. See the
detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
12
% [SR05305( BC )03/95] Safety Belts with Locking Cinch Tongue
for Rear Outboard Seating Positions
[SR05307( BC )04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with safety seat belts
containing a cinch tongue at the rear outboard
seating positions.
*[SR05310( BC )03/95] The locking cinch tongue will slide up and
down the belt webbing when the belt is in the
stowed position or while putting seat belts on.
When the locking cinch tongue of the
lap/shoulder combination seat belt is latched
into the buckle, the cinch tongue will allow the
lap portion to become shorter, but locks the
webbing in place to restrict it from becoming
longer.
*[SR05320( BC )03/95] Before you can reach and latch a combination
lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor.
While holding the webbing below the tongue,
grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue so
that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward. Provide enough lap belt length
so that the tongue can reach the buckle.
*[SR05325( BC )03/95] NOTE: If you grasp the tongue by the tongue
cover to lengthen the belt, the tongue
cover will grab the webbing, making it
difficult to slide.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
13
[SR05330( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011373-A
Adjusting the cinch tongue rear combination lap and
shoulder belt
*[SR05335( BC )05/95] To fasten a cinch tongue, pull the combination
lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt
crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt
is not twisted. If the belt is twisted remove the
twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
*[SR05400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low
as possible around the hips, not around
the waist.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
14
*[SR05500( BCGV)03/95] RWARNING
All front and rear seat outboard
occupants (including pregnant women)
should wear lap and shoulder belts, for
optimum protection in a collision.
*[SR05600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing it around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for
more than one person.
*[SR05630( BC )03/95] Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the buckles
and tongues toward the center of the vehicle
may be hidden by the rear edge of the seat
cushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible.
*[SR05635( BC )03/95] While you are fastened in the seat belt, the
combination lap/shoulder belt with a cinch
tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if
you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle
receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more,
the safety belt will become locked and help
reduce your forward movement.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
15
[SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts:
[SR05900(MBC )06/93] 1. Push the release button on the end of the
buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch
from the buckle.
[SR06200( BC )03/95]
one third page art:0011336-A
Unfastening the front outboard lap/shoulder belts
[SR06250( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011370-A
Unfastening the rear outboard lap/shoulder belts
*[SR06600( ALL)03/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to
its stowed position. If you do not guide the
tongue, it may strike you or part of the
vehicle.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
16
% [SR09300( BC )05/95] Lap Belts — Rear Center Seating
Positions
*[SR09600( BC )05/95] The lap belt in the center of the rear seat does
not adjust automatically. You must adjust it to
fit snugly and as low as possible around your
hips. Do not wear it around your waist.
*[SR09701( BCGV)05/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert the
tongue into the correct buckle on your seat
until you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make sure
the buckle is securely fastened.
%*[SR09801( BCGV)05/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and
tip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.
Pull the belt tongue over your lap until it
reaches the buckle.
*[SR09901( BCGV)05/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose
end of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.
*[SR10300( BCGV)05/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on
the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch
from the buckle.
[SR10400( BC )11/92] Because the center lap belt does not have a
retractor, it should be shortened and fastened
when not in use.
[SR10620( BC )05/94]
one third page art:0000029-E
Unfastening center rear seat lap belt
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
17
%*[SR17500( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly
*[SR17600( ALL)05/95] For some people, the safety belt may be too
short even when it is fully extended. You can
add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length
with a safety belt extension assembly (part
number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost from your dealer.
*[SR17700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Failure to follow these instructions will
affect the performance of the safety belts
and increase the risk of personal injury.
*[SR17705( ALL)05/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the same
supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer
identification is located at the end of the
webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt
extension only if the safety belt is too short for
you when fully extended. Do not use extension
to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
[SR17710( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Maintenance
*[SR17720(MBCG )05/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically to
make sure that they work properly and are not
damaged.
%*[SR17730( ALL)05/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,
buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether
bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after any
collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies used in vehicles involved in a
collision be replaced. However, if the collision
was minor and a qualified technician finds that
the belts do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
18
during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation
is noted.
%*[SR17740( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts
*[SR17780( ALL)05/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soap
solution that is recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the
belt webbing because this may weaken it.
*[SR17800( ALL)04/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
*[SR18200( ALL)04/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), provided
at these seating positions in addition to the
lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to
supplement the protection provided to properly
belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal
collisions. The supplemental air bag system does
not provide restraint to the lower body.
*[SR18400( ALL)02/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts
*[SR18425( ALL)11/93] RWARNING
Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle
occupants to be properly restrained and
help reduce the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR18450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
All occupants of the vehicle, including the
driver, should always wear their safety
belts, even when an air bag Supplemental
Restraint System is provided.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
19
*[SR18500( ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use
safety belts even with an air bag system. Use
your safety belts to:
*[SR18600( ALL)01/95] help keep you in the proper position (away
from the air bag) when it inflates
*[SR18700( ALL)01/95] reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or
rear impact collisions, because an air bag is
not designed to inflate in such situations
*[SR18800( ALL)01/95] reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions
that are not severe enough to activate the
supplemental air bag
*[SR18900( ALL)01/95] reduce the risk of being thrown from your
vehicle
%*[SR19100( ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated
*[SR19200( ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely
fast to help provide additional protection for
you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate
with considerable force. If you are not seated in
a normal riding position with your back against
the seatback, the air bag may not protect you
properly and could possibly hurt you as it
inflates.
*[SR19230( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If a passenger is not properly seated and
restrained, an inflating air bag could cause
serious injury.
*[SR19235( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Rear-facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seat.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
20
[SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is
closer to the air bag. The force of the rapidly
inflating air bag could push the top of the
rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,
center console (if so equipped), or center
armrests (if so equipped). REAR-FACING
INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED
IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety
seats and infant seats should be secured in the
rear seat whenever possible.
*[SR19260( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger air bag. Air bags deploy with great
force, faster than the blink of an eye. Front
passengers, especially children and small adults,
must never sit on the front edge of the seat,
stand near the glove compartment of the
instrument panel, or lean over near the air bag
cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants
should sit with their backs against the seatback,
move the seat to the most rearward position if
possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should
use child or infant seats.
%*[SR19300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
[SR19350(MBC )05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING
PASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOP
OF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THE
VEHICLE SEATBACK OR CENTER
CONSOLE/ARMRESTS. REAR-FACING
INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED
IN THE REAR SEAT.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
21
*[SR19400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not place objects or mount equipment
on or near the air bag cover on the
steering wheel or in front seat areas that
may come in contact with a deploying air
bag. Failure to follow this instruction may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
*[SR19405( ALL)05/95] For additional important safety information on
the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and
infant seats, please read the other sections of this
part of the Owner Guide, especially sections
entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats
for Children.
*[SR19410( ALL)05/95] For further information about the proper
mounting of equipment in the front seat of this
vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled
Some Important Information About Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System which can be
obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.
Ask for brochure FPS-8602.
%*[SR19500( ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System Operates
[SR19650( ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering
wheel. The right front passenger seat air bag is
in the upper right hand section of the
instrument panel ledge above the glove
compartment. Both air bags are designed to stay
out of sight until they are activated.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
22
[SR20001( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011353-A
The location of the air bag and warning labels
*[SR20800( ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the
severity of the impact and activates the air bags
if necessary. The air bag system is designed to
deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions
more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of
similar size and weight) head-on at about
28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses
the crash severity rather than vehicle speed,
some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph
(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.
*[SR20930( ALL)05/95] The whole inflation and deflation process takes
place in a matter of seconds.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
23
*[SR20960( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after
inflation.
*[SR21110( ALL)03/93]
half page art:0011063-A
Inflated driver side air bag
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
24
[SR21130( ALL)10/94]
half page art:0011064-A
Inflated right front passenger side air bag
*[SR22200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG
WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND
MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If
the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR22210( ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and a
tone to indicate the condition of the system. The
readiness light is in the instrument cluster. When
you turn the ignition to the ON position, this
light will illuminate for approximately six (6)
seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the
system is operating normally. NOTE:
Maintenance of the air bag system is not
required.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
25
%*[SR22220( ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one
or more of the following:
[SR22225( ALL)05/95] the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,
or
[SR22230( ALL)05/95] it will not light immediately after the ignition
is turned on, or
[SR22240( ALL)05/95] a group of five beeps will be heard.
*[SR22250( ALL)05/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag
system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bag
supplemental restraint system may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
*[SR22260( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the Air Bag Supplemental
Restraint System or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
%*[SR22300( ALL)05/95]
Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
vehicles
*[SR22400( ALL)05/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
%*[SR23500( ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children
*[SR23600( ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law
to use safety restraints for children. If small
children ride in your vehicle — this generally
includes children who are four years old or
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or
less — you must put them in safety seats that
are made specially for children. Safety belts
alone do not provide maximum protection for
these children. Check your local and state laws
for specific requirements.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
26
*[SR23700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
*[SR23800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Passengers should not be allowed to ride
in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a
seat with a fastened seat belt are much
more likely to suffer serious injury in a
collision. Cargo should always be secured
to prevent it from shifting and causing
damage to the vehicle or harm to
passengers.
*[SR23900( ALL)05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
*[SR24000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
*[SR24100( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
27
*[SR24200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your
vehicle.
%*[SR24250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
%*[SR25100( ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children
*[SR25200( ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the
size and weight of the child. Always follow the
safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when
installing and using the safety seat.
% [SR25225( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat
having a top tether strap. Install the child safety
seat in a seating position which is capable of
providing a tether anchorage. For more
information on top tether straps see your Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[SR25250( ALL)02/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to
use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating
position, and make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
*[SR25275( ALL)05/95] Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg)
should use child or infant seats. Forward facing
child seats must have the passenger seat moved
as far back from the instrument panel as
possible.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
28
%*[SR25300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD
NEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT.
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST
ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR
SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions
could result in serious injury.
*[SR25350( ALL)05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
*[SR25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If you do not properly secure the safety
seat, the child occupying the seat may be
injured during a collision or sudden stop.
An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.
*[SR25500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
*[SR25520(MBC )05/95] RWARNING
Always keep the buckle release button
pointing upward and away from the child
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button as shown in
the following illustration.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
29
% [SR31859( BC )05/95] Installing Safety Seats in the Front
Outboard Passenger Seating Position
[SR31861( ALL)03/95] For seating positions equipped with a dual
locking mode retractor, use the following
procedure.
[SR31865( ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat or
infant carrier in the front seating positions, move
vehicle seat as far back as possible.
*[SR31870( ALL)04/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of the
passenger seat.
*[SR31875( ALL)04/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp
shoulder belt and lap belt together. Figure 1.
*[SR31880( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011238-B
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
30
*[SR31885( ALL)04/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue through
the child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be
sure that the belt webbing is not twisted.
*[SR31890( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011239-B
Routing the lap/shoulder belt
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
31
*[SR31893( ALL)04/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that
seating position until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Figure 3. Make sure tongue is
latched securely to buckle by pulling on
tongue.
*[SR31895( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011240-B
Buckling the belt
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
32
*[SR31900( ALL)04/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard. At this time,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child seat restraint mode). Figure 4.
*[SR31902( ALL)04/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor must
be in the automatic locking mode to
properly restrain a child.
*[SR31905( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011241-A
Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
*[SR31910( ALL)04/95] 6. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be
heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Push down on the child seat while you pull
up on the belt to remove any slack in the
belt. Figures 5 and 6.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
33
*[SR31915( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011242-A
*[SR31920( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011243-A
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
34
*[SR31925( ALL)04/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat,
forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and
tug it forward to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place, Figure 7.
*[SR31930( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011244-A
Checking that the seat is secure
*[SR31935( ALL)04/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. Try to pull more
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the
belt is in the automatic locking mode,
Figure 8.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
35
*[SR31940( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011245-B
Checking the retractor
*[SR31945( ALL)04/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4
through 7.
% [SR31960( BC )03/95] Installing Child Safety Seats in the Rear
Outboard Seating Positions
[SR31970( BC )03/95] Your rear outboard seating positions are
equipped with a cinch tongue on the safety
belts. Use the following procedure for installing
a child safety seat in these locations.
*[SR31980( BC )04/95] 1. Grasp the belt webbing below the tongue
and pull as much of the belt out of the
retractor as possible. Hold the belt out. See
Figure 1.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
36
[SR31990( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011363-A
*[SR32000( BC )04/95] NOTE: The belt webbing below the tongue is
the lap belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing
above the tongue is the shoulder belt
portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt.
*[SR32010( BC )04/95] 2. With your other hand, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue (not the cover) and
slide the tongue up the webbing as far as it
will go. See Figure 1. Release the tongue, but
do not let go of the lap portion of the belt
webbing.
*[SR32020( BC )04/95] 3. While still holding the belt webbing below
the tongue in one hand, use your other hand
to grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue
and belt webbing together, and again pull
out as much of the belt as possible. Then, let
go of the lap portion of the belt webbing.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
37
*[SR32030( BC )04/95] 4. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue and
webbing through the child seat according to
the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
See Figure 2. Be sure that the belt webbing
is not twisted.
*[SR32040( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011364-A
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
38
*[SR32050( BC )04/95] 5. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle
for that seating position until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue
is securely latched to the buckle by pulling
on the tongue. See Figure 3.
*[SR32060( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011365-A
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
39
*[SR32070( BC )04/95] 6. Push down on the child seat and pull up on
the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap
belt portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt. See Figure 4.
*[SR32080( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011366-A
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
40
*[SR32090( BC )04/95] 7. Grasp belt close to child seat and pull on the
shoulder belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, then allow the belt to
retract and remove all slack to securely
tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.
See Figure 5.
*[SR32100( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011367-A
*[SR32110( BC )04/95] 8. Before placing the child into the child seat,
forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-side
and in forward directions to make sure that
the seat is held securely in place. See Figures
6 and 7. If the child seat moves excessively,
repeat steps 6 through 8, or properly install
the child seat in a different seating position.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
41
[SR32120( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011368-A
*[SR32130( BC )05/95]
half page art:0011369-A
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
42
*[SR32140( BC )04/95] 9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap/shoulder belt.
The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the
lap belt tight during a collision.
% [SR32150( BCGV)03/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the Rear
Center Seating Position with Adjustable
Lap Belt
[SR32160( BCGV)03/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,
hold the tongue so that its bottom is
perpendicular to the direction of webbing
while sliding the tongue up the webbing.
[SR32170( BCGV)03/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the center
seating position.
[SR32180( BCGV)03/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through the
child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
[SR32190( BCGV)03/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle
for the center seating position until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by
pulling on tongue.
[SR32200( BCGV)03/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pulling
on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to
tighten the belt.
[SR32210( BCGV)03/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat,
forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-side
and in forward direction to ensure that the
seat is held securely in place. If the child
seat moves excessively, repeat steps 5
through 6, or properly install the child seat
in a different position.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
43
%*[SR38300( ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Children
*[SR38400( ALL)05/95] Children who are too large for child safety seats
should always wear safety belts. (See instructions
with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,
to determine maximum size of child that will
safely fit in the seat.)
*[SR38500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If safety belts are not properly worn and
adjusted as described, the risk of serious
injury to the child in a collision will be
much greater.
*[SR38600(MBCG )05/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and
shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does
not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder
belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the
vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
*[SR38700( BC )03/95] RWARNING
If the shoulder belt cannot be properly
positioned, the child should sit in the
center rear seat and use the lap belt.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
44
*[SR38830( ALL)04/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on
children who have outgrown child safety seats,
Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and
provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that
encourages safer seating posture and better fit of
lap and shoulder belts on the child. A
belt-positioning booster should be used if the
shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or
neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on
both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let
the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion
when the lower legs hang over the edge of the
seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the
specific needs of your child with your
pediatrician.
*[SR38860( ALL)04/95] RWARNING
Do not use a belt-positioning booster with
a lap-only belt.
*[SR38900( ALL)05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and
shoulder belts should always be worn snugly
and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.
*[SR39000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
File:rcsrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:51:53 1995
45
Starting Your Cougar
*[ST03400( ALL)03/95] Ignition
%*[ST03500( ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition
[ST03750( ALL)12/94]
quarter page art:0010035-B
The positions of the key in the ignition
%*[ST03901( BCGV)03/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s
electrical accessories such as the radio and the
windshield wipers to operate while the engine is
not running.
% [ST04001( ALL)12/94] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the
automatic transmission gearshift lever.
*[ST04101( ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to
remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to
protect your vehicle from theft.
*[ST04200( ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all
accessories without locking the steering wheel or
the automatic transmission gearshift lever.
*[ST04300( ALL)03/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning
lights (except the brake system warning light) to
make sure they work before you start the
engine. The key returns to the ON position once
the engine is started and remains in this position
while the engine runs.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
46
*[ST04400( ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once
the engine starts so that you do not damage the
starter. The key should return to ON when you
release it. The START position also allows you
to test the brake warning light.
%*[ST04900( ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition
*[ST05600( BCGV)03/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).
*[ST05800( ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.
*[ST05900( BCGV)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
*[ST06050( BCGV)03/95] 4. Remove the key.
[ST06660( BCGV)03/95] NOTE: The automatic transmission gearshift
must be in P (Park) to move the key to
the lock position.
%*[ST06675( ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, move
the steering wheel left or right until the key
turns freely.
%*[ST06700( ALL)03/95] If the driver’s door is open while the key is still
in the ignition, a warning chime sounds.
*[ST06825( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
*[ST06875( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
Do not leave children, unreliable adults,
or pets alone in your vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or others
through inadvertent operation of the
vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe and possibly fatal injuries to
people as well as animals.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
47
%*[ST07000( ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines
*[ST07100( ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most
important thing to remember is to avoid
pressing down on the accelerator before or
during starting. Only use the accelerator when
you have problems getting your vehicle started.
See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for
details about when to use the accelerator while
you start your vehicle.
*[ST07300( ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle
%*[ST07400( ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle
*[ST07500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not start your vehicle in a closed
garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in
a stopped vehicle for more than a short
period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding
Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for
more instructions.
*[ST07600( ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:
*[ST07700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure you and all your passengers
buckle your safety belts. See Safety Restraints
in the Index for more details.
*[ST07800( ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other
accessories are turned off when starting.
*[ST08100( BCGV)03/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is set before you turn
the key.
*[ST08400( ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test
the warning lights on the instrument panel to
make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning
Lights and Gauges chapter.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
48
%*[ST10300( ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine
*[ST10325( ALL)02/95] To start your engine:
*[ST10350( ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start
Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section.
*[ST10353( ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
*[ST10357( ALL)03/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when
starting your engine. DO NOT use the
accelerator while the vehicle is parked.
*[ST10360( ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position
(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the
key to return to the ON position after the
engine has started.
*[ST10370( ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel slightly because it
may be binding.
%*[ST10430( ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:
*[ST10440( ALL)04/95] At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If
the engine does not start in fifteen (15)
seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,
wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you
do not flood the engine, then try again.
*[ST10450( ALL)04/95] At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the
engine does not start in five (5) seconds on
the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait
approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not
flood the engine, then try again.
%*[ST10460( ALL)04/95] For a warm engine:
*[ST10470( ALL)04/95] Do not hold the key in the START position
for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If
the engine does not start within five (5)
seconds on the first try, turn the key to the
OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the
starter stops, then try again.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
49
*[ST10473( ALL)04/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key
as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter or flood the engine.
*[ST10476( ALL)04/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a few
seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and
put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the
parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal
and drive away in the normal manner.
[ST10478( ALL)12/94] NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock that
prevents you from shifting out of
P (Park) unless your foot is on the
brake pedal.
%*[ST10480( ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:
*[ST10492( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
*[ST10494( ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor
and hold it.
*[ST10496( ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.
*[ST10497( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the engine
starts.
*[ST10498( ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the
engine speeds up. Then drive away in the
normal manner.
*[ST10500( ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been triggered. For
directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel
Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.
%*[ST11100( ALL)04/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idle
speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s
idle speed normally runs higher than when it’s
warmed up. These faster engine speeds will
make your vehicle move slightly faster than its
normal idle speed. It should, however, slow
down after a short time. If it does not, have the
idle speed checked.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
50
*[ST11210( ALL)05/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle
checked.
*[ST11225( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Extended idling at high engine speeds can
produce very high temperatures in the
engine and exhaust system, creating the
risk of fire or other damage.
*[ST11250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
*[ST11300( ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero
temperatures, use an engine block heater
(if your vehicle has this option).
%*[ST11400( ALL)03/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)
*[ST11500( ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommended
if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater
warms the engine coolant, which improves
starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows
the heater-defrost system to respond quickly.
*[ST11700( ALL)02/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a
grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that
you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a
ground fault circuit interrupter.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
51
*[ST11800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To prevent electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.
*[ST11900( ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before you start your vehicle. Using the
heater for longer than three hours will not
damage the engine, so you can plug it in at
night to start your vehicle the following
morning.
*[ST12000( ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block
heater before driving your vehicle.
%*[ST13100( ALL)02/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
*[ST13200( ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless and
odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
*[ST13300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not start your vehicle in a closed
garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in
a stopped vehicle for more than a short
period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding
Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for
more instructions.
*[ST13400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
52
*[ST13500( ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems
checked whenever:
*[ST13600( ALL)02/95] your vehicle is raised for service
*[ST13700( ALL)02/95] the sound of the exhaust system changes
*[ST13800( ALL)01/95] your vehicle has been damaged in a collision
*[ST13900( ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet
vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.
[ST14000( ALL)12/94] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in
an open area for long periods of time, open the
windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, the
heating or air conditioning system should be set
to any function except MAX A/C or AUTO.
[ST14125( BCGV)05/94] If you use the heater, set the fan speed on
MEDIUM or HIGH with the function control
on any position except OFF and the
temperature control at any desired position.
[ST14250( BCGV)12/88] If you use the air conditioner, set the fan
speed on MEDIUM or HIGH with the
function control on any position except OFF
or MAX and the temperature control at any
desired position.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
53
%*[ST17100( ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but Does
Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
%*[ST17110( ALL)04/95] Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch
*[ST17200( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does
not start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-off
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off
switch is a device intended to stop the fuel
pump when your vehicle has been involved in a
substantial jolt.
*[ST17400( BCGV)01/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must
reset the switch by hand before you can start
your vehicle. The switch is on the left side of the
trunk.
[ST17700( BC )05/94]
one third page art:0010013-E
The fuel pump shut-off switch
*[ST18700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the
switch or try to start your vehicle. Have
all the passengers get out of the vehicle
and call the local fire department or a
towing service.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
54
*[ST18800( ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a
collision or substantial jolt:
*[ST18900( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
*[ST19000( ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
*[ST19100( ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red
reset button down. If the button is already
set, you may have a different mechanical
problem.
*[ST19200( ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for
a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF
position.
*[ST19300( ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking
fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start
your vehicle again. If you do not see or
smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle
again.
*[ST19350( ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before
driving the vehicle.
*[ST19400( ALL)01/95] Pushing
[ST19600( BCGV)03/95] Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be
started by pushing. Follow the directions under
If Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start.
File:rcstc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:31 1995
55
Warning Lights and
Gauges
*[LG00400( ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your
vehicle is divided into several different sections.
The illustrations on the following pages show
the major parts of the instrument panel that are
described in this chapter. Some items shown
may not be on all vehicles.
[LG00500( BCGV)05/94] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges
are grouped together in the instrument cluster
and the indicator lamp module.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
56
% [LG02200( BC )05/95]
full page art:0010109-P
Mechanical cluster
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
57
*[LG02700( BCGV)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster
*[LG02800( BCGV)06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are on
the mechanical cluster. All of the warning lights
and gauges alert you to possible problems with
your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are
optional. The following sections detail what each
of these indicators means.
%*[LG02900( ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light
*[LG03000( ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show two
things — that the parking brake is not fully
released, or that the brake fluid level is low in
the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by a
qualified service technician.
[LG03025( BC )07/93]
one inch art:0010116-D
[LG03100( ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake is
set, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition key to START. It normally
goes off shortly after the engine starts and you
release the parking brake. If the light stays on
after you have fully released the parking brake,
have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
*[LG03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes
may not be working properly. Have the
brakes checked immediately.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
58
% [LG03475( ALL)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light
(If equipped)
[LG03500( ALL)05/94] This warning light will go on each time you
start your vehicle. If it remains on for longer
than five seconds, you should shut off your
engine and restart. If the anti-lock brake light
stays on, this indicates that the anti-lock feature
is disabled and should receive immediate
attention by a qualified service technician.
Normal braking is not affected unless the brake
warning light is also lit.
*[LG03505( BCGV)01/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-check
capabilities. As previously described, the system
turns on the anti-lock light each time you start
your engine. After the engine is started and the
anti-lock light is out, the system performs
another test the first time the vehicle reaches
14 mph (22 km/h). The system turns on the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) pump motor for
approximately 1/2 second. At this time a
mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal
part of the self-check feature. If a malfunction is
found during this check the anti-lock light will
come on.
[LG03680( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0011194-B
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
59
*[LG03700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If the anti-lock brake system warning
light remains on or comes on while
driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon
as possible.
[LG03800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock
system, and the brake warning light is
not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled
but normal brake function remains
operational.
%*[LG04300( ALL)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
*[LG04305( ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you to
fasten your safety belt. The following conditions
will take place:
[LG04317( BC )03/95] If the safety belt is not buckled when the key
is turned to the ON position, the light will
come on for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime
will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.
*[LG04320(MBC )03/95] If the safety belt is buckled while the light is
on and the chime is sounding, both the light
and chime will turn off.
[LG04340( BC )03/95] If the safety belt is buckled before the key is
turned to the ON position, the light will
come on for 1 to 2 minutes.
[LG04600( ALL)05/92]
one inch art:0010118-A
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
60
%*[LG04610( ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light
[LG04620( ALL)05/94] The air bag system uses a readiness light to
indicate the condition of the system. If the
system is functioning properly, the light will
stay on for 6 seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
[LG04630( ALL)05/94] If there is a problem with the system, two things
may happen: the readiness light will either flash
or stay lit up, or you will hear a beeping sound.
If either of these things happen, have the air bag
system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.
[LG04645( BC )05/95]
one inch art:0011355-A
%*[LG04700( ALL)01/95] Charging System Light
*[LG04800( ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not being
charged and that you need to have the electrical
system checked.
[LG04900( ALL)05/92]
one inch art:0010119-A
*[LG05100( ALL)02/95] This light comes on every time you turn the
ignition to the ON or START position (engine
off). The light should go off when the engine
starts and the alternator begins to charge.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
61
*[LG05200( ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the
engine is running, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible.
%*[LG05205( BCGV)05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator
[LG05210( ALL)06/93]
one inch art:0010730-A
*[LG05220( BCGV)01/95] This light tells you that the Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) on the gearshift lever has been
pushed. When the light is on, the transmission
will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the
button on the shifter will return the vehicle to
“overdrive on” mode. The transmission will be
in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is
started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected
when the vehicle was last shut off.
*[LG05230( ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when the
TCS is depressed or if the light flashes
when you are driving, have your
vehicle serviced at the first
opportunity. If this condition persists,
damage could occur to the
transmission.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
62
%*[LG07200( ALL)01/95] High Beam Light
*[LG07300( ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps are
turned to high beam or when you flash the
lights.
[LG07400( ALL)05/92]
one inch art:0010125-A
% [LG08300( BC )07/93] Check Gauges Warning Light (if equipped)
[LG08310( BC )03/93]
one inch art:0010128-D
*[LG08400( BC )06/94] This light will come on when the key is in the
ON position and the:
[LG08500( BC )04/89] engine coolant temperature gauge is high, or
[LG08600( BC )04/89] engine oil pressure gauge is low, or
[LG08700( BC )05/95] when the fuel tank has reached empty
reserve.
[LG08825( BC )03/90] This light serves as a reminder for you to check
the engine coolant temperature gauge, the
engine oil pressure gauge or the fuel gauge. It
will come on if there is a condition that needs
your attention.
[LG08850( BC )07/93] See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge, Engine Oil
Pressure Gauge,orFuel Gauge in this chapter for
more information.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
63
%*[LG11005( ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light
*[LG11015( ALL)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)
system consists of the hardware and software
necessary to monitor the operation of the
powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to
check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain
control system during normal operation. If an
emission problem is detected, the Check Engine
Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.
*[LG11020( ALL)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may
cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.
Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular
phones, and CB radios must be carefully
installed. Do not install these devices by tapping
into or running wires close to powertrain control
system wires or components.
*[LG11050( ALL)03/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON, but it should turn off when
the engine starts. If the light does not come on
when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes
on and stays on when you are driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with one of the
vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
*[LG11055( ALL)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second
intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it
means that the engine is misfiring. If this
condition persists, damage could occur to the
engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
64
*[LG11060( ALL)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions
while you are driving, it means that a
malfunction occurred and the condition corrected
itself.
*[LG11065( ALL)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself
occurs when an engine running out of fuel
begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine
Warning Light may turn on and will then set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the
engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel
was being consumed. After refueling, the Check
Engine Warning Light will turn off after the
vehicle has completed three consecutive warm
up cycles without a misfire condition occurring.
A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a
cold condition (engine at ambient temperature)
and running until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
*[LG11075( ALL)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine
Warning Light will turn off as soon as the
engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to
have the engine serviced.
*[LG11100( BCGV)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine
Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. If the Check Engine
Warning Light comes on and you suspect that
the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the
road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off
the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,
making sure it is properly seated.
*[LG11200( ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up
cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the
Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If
the light does not go off after the fourth engine
restart, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer or a qualified technician.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
65
%*[LG12910( ALL)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights
*[LG12920( ALL)08/93] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the
direction in which you are going to be turning.
[LG12950( ALL)06/93]
one inch art:0010525-A
%*[LG13000( ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge
[LG13025( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011340-A
The fuel gauge
[LG13100( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately how
much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the
ignition switch is ON. For proper fuel gauge
indication after adding fuel, turn the ignition
switch OFF while refueling the vehicle.
[LG13150( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when
the vehicle is in motion. The most accurate
reading is obtained with the vehicle on level
ground.
*[LG13200( ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge
indicator may drift from the ignition switch ON
position.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
66
%*[LG13400( ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
*[LG13550( ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the
coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the
gauge indication will not be accurate.
[LG13600( ALL)03/94] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into
the NORMAL band as your engine coolant
warms up. Under normal driving conditions, the
pointer should stay in the NORMAL band. It is
acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the
NORMAL band under normal driving
conditions, and under certain driving conditions
such as, heavy stop and go traffic, or driving up
hills in hot weather, for the pointer to indicate at
the top of the NORMAL band.
[LG13650( ALL)05/94] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves
above the NORMAL band, the engine is
overheating and continued operation may cause
engine damage.
% [LG13730( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011144-C
The engine coolant temperature gauge
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
67
*[LG14100( ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:
*[LG14200( ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG14300( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.
*[LG14400( ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE
COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL
THE ENGINE IS COOL.
*[LG14500( ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the
instructions on checking and adding coolant
to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the
Index. If you do not follow these
instructions, you or others could be injured.
*[LG14600( ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the
coolant system serviced.
%*[LG14800( ALL)01/95] Speedometer
[LG14825( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011341-A
The speedometer
*[LG14900( ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles
(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.
%*[LG15000( ALL)01/95] Odometer
*[LG15100( ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles
(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
68
%*[LG15200( ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer
*[LG15300( ALL)03/93] If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9
miles (kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simply
set the trip odometer to zero by pressing the
reset button firmly when beginning the distance
you wish to measure.
*[LG15350( ALL)01/95] Since the trip odometer displays distance
independent of the odometer it will not always
advance to the next mile (kilometer) at the same
time as the odometer.
%*[LG15450(MBC )02/95] Tachometer
[LG15470( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011342-A
The tachometer
*[LG15600(MBC )01/95] The tachometer displays the approximate engine
revolutions per minute (rpm), or how fast the
engine is running.
*[LG15900( BC )01/95] You can drive your vehicle at most rpm points
on the tachometer but you must stay out of the
red zone.
[LG16000( BC )03/90] Regardless of the type of transmission in your
vehicle, if you drive with the tachometer pointer
in the red zone, you may damage the engine.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
69
% [LG16220( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (If Equipped)
*[LG16225( ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage when
the ignition key is in the ON position.
*[LG16230( ALL)05/94] If the battery is operating under cold weather
conditions, the pointer may indicate in the upper
range of the NORMAL band while the battery is
charging. If you are running electrical accessories
(when the engine is off, or idling at a low
speed), the pointer may move toward the lower
end of the NORMAL band.
*[LG16260( ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your
vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it
is safely possible.
[LG16285( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0010655-D
Battery voltage gauge
%*[LG16300( ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
[LG16500( ALL)05/94] This gauge indicates the engine oil pressure, not
the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level
is low, it could affect the oil pressure. With the
engine running, the pointer should move into
the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below
the NORMAL band while the engine is running,
you have lost oil pressure and continued
operation will cause severe engine damage.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
70
[LG16550( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011146-B
Engine oil pressure gauge
*[LG16600( ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:
*[LG16700( ALL)01/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG16800( ALL)04/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe
engine damage could result.
[LG16900( ALL)05/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the
instructions on checking and adding engine
oil, see the Engine Oil in the Index. If you do
not follow these instructions, you or others
could be injured. To assure an accurate
reading, your car should be on level ground.
[LG17000( ALL)05/94] 4. If the level is low, add oil as necessary
before you start the engine again. Do not
overfill. Do not operate the engine if the
pointer is below the NORMAL band,
regardless of the oil level. Contact your
nearest dealer for further service actions.
[LG17200( ALL)05/94] For more information about adding oil, see
Engine Oil Recommendations in the Index.
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
71
% [LG17205( BC )03/95] Indicator Lamp Module
(If equipped)
[LG17208( BC )05/94] The following warning lights are on the
indicator lamp module. All of the warning lights
alert you to possible problems. Some of the
lights listed are optional. The following section
details what each of these indicators mean.
[LG17210( BC )03/95]
one third page art:0011215-A
The indicator lamp module
% [LG17215( BC )04/95] Door Ajar Light (If equipped)
[LG17220( BC )06/92] This light tells you when any door is not
completely shut. It glows when the key is in the
ON position.
[LG17225( BC )03/94]
one inch art:0010126-B
The door ajar light
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
72
% [LG17230( BC )07/93] Low Coolant Light
[LG17235( BC )07/93] This light indicates that the level of the engine
coolant is low inside the coolant recovery bottle
and that you should add more coolant. See
Engine Coolant in the Index.
[LG17240( BC )07/93]
one inch art:0011209-A
The low coolant light
%*[LG17250( BC )07/93] Low Fuel Light
[LG17255( BC )05/95] This light comes on when your fuel gauge
indicates approximately 1/16 of a tank. Your car
must be turned to ON for this light to come on.
This light will either flicker or glow steadily.
[LG17260( BC )07/93]
one inch art:0011210-A
The low fuel light
% [LG17265( BC )07/93] Washer Fluid Low Light
*[LG17270( BC )02/95] This light comes on if the reservoir is less than a
quarter full when you turn on the windshield
washers.
[LG17275( BC )07/93]
one inch art:0011211-A
The low washer fluid light
File:rclgc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:50:19 1995
73
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP00270( BC )05/94]
full page art:0010101-K
The instrument panel
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
74
[IP00400( ALL)05/95] The main controls for the climate control system,
clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.
%*[IP00500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the
gloss (shine) of the upper part of the
instrument panel should be avoided.
The dull finish in this area is to help
protect the driver from undesirable
windshield reflection.
%*[IP00600( ALL)01/95] The Climate Control Systems
[IP00700( ALL)03/91] Your vehicle has one of two different climate
control systems. The two systems are:
[IP01200( BCGV)06/93] a manual heating and air conditioning system
[IP01250( BC )03/95] a semi-automatic temperature control
system (if equipped)
*[IP01400( ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehicle
has, see the diagrams on the following pages.
% [IP10700( BCGV)08/93] The Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
System
[IP10800( BCGV)08/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrost
the windshield, and turn on the air conditioning
with the three knobs in the center of the
instrument panel:
[IP10900( BCGV)08/93] FAN
[IP11000( BCGV)08/93] TEMP
[IP11100( BCGV)08/93] SELECT
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
75
[IP11300( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0011216-B
The knobs that control the manual heating and air
conditioning system
[IP11501( BC )05/95] To heat the interior of your vehicle, turn the
SELECT knob to FLOOR, turn the TEMP knob
to the end of the red range (full right) and turn
the FAN knob to HI. Temperature and fan speed
can be adjusted as desired.
% [IP11700( BC )05/95] To defrost the windshield and side windows,
turn the SELECT knob to defrost V, turn the
TEMP knob to the end of the red range
(full right) and turn the FAN knob to HI.
Temperature and fan speed can be adjusted as
desired.
[IP11901( BC )05/95] To heat the interior and defrost the windshield
and side windows, at the same time, turn the
SELECT knob to FLOOR & DEF, turn the TEMP
knob to the end of the red range (full right) and
turn the FAN knob to HI.
[IP12100( BC )03/94] To direct either heated or cooled air to the panel
registers and the floor at the same time, turn the
SELECT knob to PANEL & FLOOR, turn the
TEMP knob for the temperature desired and set
the fan speed as desired.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
76
[IP12300( BC )05/95] To cool your vehicle using outside air, turn the
SELECT knob to A/C, turn the TEMP knob all
the way to the end of the blue range (full left)
and turn the FAN knob to the desired speed
between LO and HI. A/C provides quieter
system operation than MAX A/C, but it is not
as efficient as MAX A/C which uses recirculated
air.
% [IP12500( BC )05/95] To ventilate your car with outside air, during
mild weather, turn the SELECT knob to PANEL,
turn the TEMP knob for the temperature desired
and set the FAN knob to the speed desired.
[IP12700( BC )08/93] Under normal conditions, the SELECT knob
should be left in any position other than MAX
A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This
allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the
outside air inlet duct.
[IP12900( BC )05/95] To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather,
turn the SELECT knob to MAX A/C, turn the
TEMP knob all the way to the end of the blue
range (full left) and turn the FAN knob to HI.
MAX A/C uses recirculated air and is the most
fuel efficient way to cool your vehicle and can
also be used in heavy traffic to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. MAX A/C can
also be used in high humidity areas for more
efficient operation.
[IP13100( BC )08/93] If the interior of your vehicle is very warm,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows
open. This forces most of the hot, stale air out of
the vehicle and allows the air conditioning to
work faster.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
77
% [IP13300( BCGV)01/89]
Adjusting the panel register airflow
[IP13400( BCGV)03/92] The instrument panel registers may be adjusted
to your comfort needs. The thumbwheel controls
the volume of air and the knob in the center of
the register controls direction up or down or
side to side.
[IP13500( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0010183-D
Controlling the airflow from panel registers
% [IP13600( BC )03/95] The Semi Automatic Temperature Control
System (If equipped)
[IP13700( BC )03/95]
System Characteristics
[IP13800( BC )03/95] The Semi Automatic Temperature Control
System (SATC) is designed to provide comfort
consistent with the temperature setting you
select. The discharge air temperature and fan
speed will be automatically controlled to bring
the vehicle to the desired set temperature, as fast
as possible, and then gradually be changed to
maintain that temperature. The system also gives
you the capability of manually adjusting the
location of the discharge air and fan speed for
desired comfort or specific operating
requirements.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
78
[IP13900( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0010662-D
The controls for the Semi-Automatic Temperature Control
system
[IP14000( BC )03/95]
System Controls
[IP14100( BC )03/95] Digital display
[IP14200( BC )07/93] The temperature you select for your driving
comfort is displayed here. You can change the
temperature by pressing either the COOL or the
WARM button. You may also display outside
temperature for four seconds by depressing the
OUTSIDE TEMP button.
[IP14300( BC )03/95] Cool button
[IP14400( BC )07/93] This button is used to LOWER the temperature
setting. Press the button once to lower the
displayed temperature one degree. Holding the
button in will continuously reduce the
temperature setting in one degree increments
until you either release it or 65˚F (18˚C) is
reached.
[IP14500( BC )05/94] If the button is pressed after 65˚F (18˚C) is
reached, only 60˚F (16˚C) will be displayed and
the system will provide continuous maximum
cooling.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
79
[IP14600( BC )03/95] Warm button
[IP14700( BC )07/93] This button is used to RAISE the temperature
setting. Press the button once to raise the
displayed temperature one degree. Holding the
button in will continuously increase the
temperature setting in one degree increments
until you either release it or 85˚F (29˚C) is
reached.
[IP14800( BC )03/94] If the button is pressed after 85˚F (29˚C) is
reached, only 90˚F (32˚C) will be displayed and
the system will provide continuous maximum
heating.
[IP14900( BC )03/95]
System Operation
[IP15000( BC )05/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle, turn the
SELECT knob to FLOOR and turn the FAN
knob to AUTO. The fan will remain off until the
engine reaches operating temperature or until
3-1/2 minutes have elapsed. As the interior of
your vehicle warms up, the discharge air
temperature and the fan speed will be
automatically and gradually changed to maintain
the set temperature. If you prefer a fixed fan
speed, turn the fan speed switch to the desired
setting.
% [IP15100( BC )05/95] To defrost the windshield and side windows,
turn the SELECT knob to Defrost V, turn the
FAN knob to HI and set the temperature as
necessary to clear the windshield.
[IP15200( BC )07/93] To direct either cooled or heated air to the panel
registers and the floor at the same time, turn the
SELECT knob to PANEL & FLOOR, push the
COOL or WARM button for the desired
temperature and set the FAN speed as desired.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
80
[IP15300( BC )05/95] To cool your car quickly in warm weather, turn
the SELECT knob to MAX A/C and turn the
FAN knob to AUTO. As the vehicle interior
cools down, the discharge air temperature and
fan speed will automatically and gradually be
changed to maintain the set temperature with
airflow from the instrument panel registers.
[IP15400( BC )07/93] If the interior of your vehicle is very warm,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows
open. This will force the hot, stale air out and
allow the air conditioning to work faster.
% [IP15500( BC )05/95] To cool your vehicle with outside air, turn the
SELECT knob to A/C and turn the FAN knob to
AUTO or to a fixed speed setting as you desire.
Cooling your vehicle in this manner provides a
quieter system operation, but it will not cool as
efficiently and is not as fuel efficient as MAX
A/C which uses recirculated air.
[IP15600( BC )05/95] To ventilate your vehicle with outside air, turn
the SELECT knob to PANEL and the FAN knob
to AUTO. The fan will remain off until the
engine is warm enough to provide heat.
However, if the interior temperature is above the
set temperature, the fan will turn on
immediately. Temperature may be set as desired
and FAN speed can be selected.
[IP15700( BC )07/93]
A/C compressor override
[IP15800( BC )03/94] The A/C compressor can be disengaged for
more economical driving. This can be done by
turning the SELECT knob to PANEL. The A/C
compressor is automatically engaged by the
control in MAX A/C, NORM A/C, FLOOR &
DEF, and DEFROST positions if the outside
temperature is above 45˚F (7˚C).
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
81
% [IP31700(MBC )05/95] Rear Window Defroster
(If equipped)
(Standard in Canada)
*[IP32000( ALL)12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,
fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside
of the rear window.
[IP32600( BC )01/89] The button for the rear window defroster is
located on the lower right side of the instrument
panel, just left of the climate control panel.
[IP32700( BC )06/93]
one third page art:0010190-B
The button that controls the rear window defroster
[IP33000( ALL)12/94] Clear away any snow that is on the rear
window before using the defroster. With the
engine running, push the defrost button.
[IP33100( ALL)12/94] After approximately 10 minutes, the defroster
will turn off. If the window is still not clear,
turn the defroster on again.
[IP33200( ALL)12/94] The defroster will turn off when the ignition key
is turned to the OFF position.
*[IP33300( ALL)02/95] The heating elements are bonded to the inside of
the rear window. Do not use sharp objects to
scrape the inside of the rear window or use
abrasive cleaners to clean it. Doing so could
damage the heating elements.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
82
%*[IP34200( ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights
%*[IP34310( ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System
*[IP34312( ALL)03/95]
(Canadian vehicles only)
*[IP34320( ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns
the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced
light output, when:
*[IP34325( ALL)03/95] The headlamp system is in the OFF position,
and
*[IP34330( ALL)03/95] The vehicle is running, and
*[IP34340( ALL)01/95] The vehicle has a fully released parking
brake.
*[IP34360( BCGV)01/95] NOTE: If you have a vehicle with an
automatic lighting system, the DRL
system is active until the automatic
system turns on the headlamps.
*[IP34363( ALL)10/94] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn
on in the flash-to-pass mode during
nighttime driving.
*[IP34365( ALL)01/95] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker
when the vehicle is turned on or off.
This is a normal condition.
*[IP34367( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
will not illuminate the tail lamps and
parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps
at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
83
%*[IP34370( ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights
*[IP34550( BCGV)05/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side
markers, and tail lamps, use the rotary knob that
is to the left of the steering wheel.
[IP35000( BC )05/95]
half page art:0010195-D
The knob that controls the headlamps and parking lamps
(shown with autolamp feature — other models similar)
[IP35200( ALL)12/91] When you turn on the headlamps, the parking
lamps, tail lamps, and side markers
automatically turn on. But you can turn on the
parking lamps, tail lamps, and side markers
without turning on the headlamps.
*[IP36100( ALL)01/95] For more information about how the high beams
work, refer to the Steering Column Controls
chapter.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
84
[IP36130( BCGV)05/95]
Chime for headlamps on
*[IP36160( BCGV)05/95] This chime sounds if the driver or any passenger
door is open when the parking lamps or
headlamps are on. The chime sounds until you
close the door, turn off the lamps or turn the
ignition to the ON position.
%*[IP36200( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
*[IP36300( ALL)05/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these
may cause scratches or crack the lamps.
%*[IP36900( BC )02/95] Setting the Autolamp Delay System
(If equipped)
*[IP37100( BCGV)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and
off automatically. You can use the autolamp to:
*[IP37300( BCGV)01/95] turn on the lamps automatically at night
*[IP37400( BCGV)01/95] turn off the lamps automatically during
daylight
*[IP37500( BCGV)01/95] keep the lamps on for up to three minutes
after you turn the key to OFF.
[IP37900( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0010199-D
The controls for the autolamp
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
85
*[IP38200( BC )01/95] To set the autolamp:
*[IP38300( BC )05/95] 1. Make sure the headlamp knob is in the OFF
position. If the knob for the headlamps is
ON, you cancel the autolamp.
*[IP38400( BC )01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your
vehicle.
[IP38500( BC )06/93] 3. Find the autolamp thumbwheel to the right
of the panel dim thumbwheel.
[IP38900( BC )11/92] 4. Turn the thumbwheel up to the beginning of
the MAX position (within the DELAY range).
*[IP39200( BC )01/95] 5. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps
on and off for you.
*[IP39275( BCGV)01/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocell
that is located in the top left corner of the
instrument panel. This photocell controls the
autolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts as
if it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on.
*[IP39300( BC )01/95] To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheel
back to OFF.
*[IP39500( BCGV)12/92] You can set the autolamp so the lamps stay on
for up to three minutes after you turn your
vehicle off.
[IP39600( BC )12/94] To keep the lamps on after you leave your
vehicle, turn the thumbwheel as far into the
MAX range as you want.
[IP40000( BC )12/94] If you move the thumbwheel only slightly into
the DELAY area, your lamps will stay on for
only a moment after you turn your vehicle off.
The further you move the thumbwheel into the
DELAY area (toward the MAX position), the
longer the lamps will stay on after you turn
your vehicle off.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
86
%*[IP44500( ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument
Panel
[IP44700( BC )01/89]
Manual operation
*[IP44810( BC )05/95] With the light knob in the parking lamps or the
headlamps position, you can brighten or dim the
lights in the instrument panel. To do this, use
the thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel.
This wheel also turns on the interior lights with
the light knob on or off.
[IP45100( BC )06/93]
half page art:0010206-C
The thumbwheel controls the light on the instrument panel
and the interior light
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
87
[IP45450( BCGV)07/93] Using the Automatic Illuminated Entry
System (If equipped)
[IP45600( BCGV)03/91] The interior lights turn on when you lift the
outside door handle on either front door, when
any button of the keyless entry system is pushed
or when you press UNLOCK, TRUNK, or
PANIC on a programmed remote entry
transmitter if your vehicle is equipped with
remote entry.
[IP45900( BCGV)01/89] These lights automatically turn off after 25
seconds or when you turn the ignition key to
ON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off if
your have turned them on manually or if a door
is open.
[IP46000( BCGV)01/89]
Tips on the illuminated entry system:
[IP46100( BCGV)01/89] The illuminated entry timer will not turn off
the courtesy lamp if that lamp has been
turned on manually or by the door switch.
[IP46200( BCGV)01/89] Occasionally, you will need to clean the lens
of the door lock assembly. Use Ford
Multi-Purpose Cleaner Concentrate, a mild
soap, or household ammonia and water
solution. Apply with a soft cloth or cotton
swab, followed by a clear water rinse.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
88
%*[IP46300( ALL)01/95] Turning on the Map and Reading Lamps
*[IP46425( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle has two map lamps for the
passenger and the driver. To turn on the map
lamps, push the switch next to each lamp.
[IP46750( BC )07/93]
one third page art:0011214-A
Map lamp (with optional moon roof)
[IP46760( BC )07/93]
one third page art:0010651-C
Front seat map and dome lamps (without optional moon
roof)
*[IP47010( ALL)01/95] The dual beam map lamps are located on each
side of the dome lamp. Each map lamp can be
turned on by the switches on the lamp.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
89
% [IP47220( BC )11/92] Rear Seat Courtesy Lamps
[IP47250( BC )03/91] Your vehicle has rear seat courtesy lamps which
are activated when the interior lights are turned
on. These lamps are located on the quarter trim
panels.
%*[IP47270( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps
*[IP47290( ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are
plastic and should be cleaned with a mild
detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear
water.
%*[IP47300( ALL)03/95] Clock
[IP47460( BC )05/95]
quarter page art:0011164-B
The digital clock
[IP47500( ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the H
button. When the desired hour appears,
release the button.
[IP47600( ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the M
button. When the desired minute appears,
release the button.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
90
%*[IP49100( BC )04/95] Cellular Phone (If equipped)
[IP49200( BC )03/95] For information about the cellular phone in your
vehicle, refer to the Cellular Phone User’s Manual
provided with your phone. For further questions
about your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury cellular
phone, contact the Ford Cellular System at
1-800-367-3013. In Canada contact your Ford
Dealer.
[IP49300( BC )03/95] NOTE: It is recommended that you remove
your cellular phone antenna before
entering a car wash. Unscrew the
antenna from its base, located on the
rear window.
%*[IP49400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens
*[IP49500( ALL)04/95] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth
and a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear
Spray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use
paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean the
lens as these may cause scratches.
File:rcipc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:49:31 1995
91
Steering Column Controls
*[SC00200( ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel
are designed to give you easy access to the
controls while you are driving.
%*[SC00300( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever
*[SC00400( ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side
of the steering column to:
[SC00500( ALL)03/95] operate the turn signals
*[SC00600( ALL)01/95] turn the high beams on/off
*[SC00700( ALL)01/95] flash the lights
*[SC00800( ALL)01/95] turn the windshield wipers and washer
on/off
[SC01900( ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0011292-A
The turn signal lever
%*[SC02100( ALL)01/95] Turn Signals
*[SC02201( ALL)03/95] Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move
it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
92
*[SC02301( ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move
the lever back to the center (off) position.
*[SC02401( ALL)03/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough to
signal but not to latch. The lever will return to
the off position when you release it.
%*[SC02700( ALL)03/95] High Beams
*[SC02800( ALL)05/95] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp
control knob to the headlamp ON position and
push the turn signal lever away from you until
it latches. When the high beams are ON, the
high beam indicator light on the instrument
panel comes on.
*[SC02900( ALL)03/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the lever
toward you until it latches. The high beam
indicator light turns off.
%*[SC03200( ALL)05/95] Flashing the Lights
*[SC03300( ALL)05/95] To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward
you for a moment and then release it. The
headlamps will flash whether the headlamp
knob is in the on or off position.
%*[SC03500( ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer
*[SC03600( ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition
key must be turned to the ON or ACC position.
[SC03750( ALL)01/95] Rotate the end of the lever away from you to
activate the wipers. The first seven detents are
interval wipe positions, the eighth detent is the
LO position and the ninth detent is the HI
position.
*[SC03800( ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob toward
you to the OFF position.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
93
%*[SC04100( ALL)03/95] Variable Interval Wipers
*[SC04205( ALL)01/95] In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle
has wipers that you can set to operate at
varying intervals. For example, you can set the
interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles
or more often in heavier rain.
[SC04700( ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0011293-A
The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever
*[SC04900( ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at the
end of the turn signal lever toward or away
from you until the wipers are going at the
desired interval.
*[SC05300( ALL)04/95] Windshield Washer
*[SC05401( ALL)01/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of the
wiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob
pushed in. After you release the knob, the
wipers operate for two to three cycles before
turning off (if the wipers were OFF) or
returning to HI, LO, or the interval setting
selected.
*[SC05500( ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washer
fluid level and fill it if it is low. See the Servicing
Your Cougar chapter. If there is enough fluid,
consult your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
94
*[SC05600( ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the
washer fluid container is empty or activate the
washers at any time for more than 15 seconds
continuously. This could damage the washer
pump system.
*[SC05700( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
In freezing weather, the washer solution
may freeze on the windshield and obscure
your vision. Always warm up the
windshield with the defroster before you
use the washer fluid. If you cannot see
through the windshield clearly, it can
increase the risk of being involved in a
collision.
*[SC05800( ALL)04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid
or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see
Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.
%*[SC05810( ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher
[SC05820( ALL)05/95] To alert other drivers to hazardous situations,
push in the hazard flasher on the top of the
steering column. The same switch turns the
flashers off.
*[SC05830( ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is
running or not. The flashers work for up to two
hours when the battery is fully charged and in
good condition without draining the battery
excessively. If the flashers run for longer than
two hours or if the battery is not fully charged,
the battery can be drained.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
95
[SC05860( BCGV)08/93]
one third page art:0010216-B
The control switch for the hazard flashers
%*[SC05900( ALL)01/95] Horn
*[SC06000( ALL)04/95] To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
[SC06100( BC )06/93]
half page art:0001012-B
The horn on the steering wheel
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
96
%*[SC07300( ALL)01/95] Tilt Steering
*[SC07400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the
vehicle is moving.
[SC07700(MBC )03/93]
half page art:0010088-B
The lever to tilt the steering wheel
*[SC08000( ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering wheel,
pull the release lever on the column toward you.
Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
97
%*[SC08600( ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)
*[SC08800( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you can
automatically maintain a constant speed at or
above 30 mph (50 km/h).
*[SC08900( ALL)05/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or
in Canada the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
approved may cause the speed control to
malfunction. Therefore, use only properly
installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio
transmitting equipment in your vehicle.
[SC09150( BCGV)12/94] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at high
elevations, or when pulling a trailer, it
may be desirable to drive with the
transmission in the Overdrive off
mode. This can be done by depressing
the Transmission Control Switch on
the transmission gear selection lever.
Driving in this mode prevents the
transmission from shifting excessively
when ascending grades, and helps
maintain speed when going down
steep hills.
*[SC09200( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using
the speed control. This will cause the
engine to overspeed.
[SC09250( ALL)12/94] When driving uphill, especially with a heavy
load, significant speed drops may occur. If the
speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h) the
automatic speed control will, by design, be
suspended. Some vehicles may require
temporary resumption of manual speed control
while ascending steep grades in order to
maintain the selected speed.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
98
[SC09300(MBC )08/93]
half page art:0001014-B
The speed control switches on the steering wheel
*[SC10100( ALL)03/95] To set the speed control:
*[SC10300( ALL)03/95] 1. Press and release the ON switch.
*[SC10400( ALL)04/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above
30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator
pedal.
*[SC10800( ALL)03/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately to set your speed. If you keep
this switch pressed, your speed will continue
to increase.
*[SC10900( ALL)03/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.
*[SC11000( ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your
vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed
up, even though the speed control is on. This is
normal.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
99
*[SC11030( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your set
speed while driving in D (Drive) on a
downhill grade, you may want to
depress the Transmission Control
Switch located on the shift lever to
turn off overdrive to reduce vehicle
speed. Speed control cannot reduce the
vehicle speed if it goes above your set
speed on a downhill grade.
*[SC11100( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not use the speed control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.
%*[SC11200( ALL)03/95] Accelerating With the Speed Control
Operating
*[SC11300( ALL)03/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up
momentarily. When you take your foot off the
accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
%*[SC11400( ALL)01/95] Resetting the Speed Control
*[SC11450( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use
one of the following procedures:
[SC11500( ALL)05/94] COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
[SC11550( ALL)05/94] Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle
attains the desired speed, press the SET
ACCEL switch and release it immediately.
*[SC11650( ALL)04/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph
(50 km/h) by any of the above methods, then
you must manually accelerate to a speed over
30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
100
*[SC11700( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed,
follow one of these procedures:
[SC11750( ALL)05/94] ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL
switch. Release the switch when the vehicle
has accelerated to the desired speed.
[SC11800( ALL)05/94] Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, press the
SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately.
%*[SC12800( ALL)03/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed
[SC13000( BCGV)03/95] If you press the brake pedal, speed control is
suspended. You can return to the set speed by
pressing the RESUME switch, as long as you did
not press the OFF switch. You must be driving
at least 30 mph (48 km/h).
*[SC13400( ALL)03/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to the
previously set speed and then maintain it.
%*[SC13501( ALL)01/95] To Turn Speed Control Off
*[SC13601( ALL)04/95] Press the OFF switch.
*[SC13701( ALL)01/95] Speed control is also turned OFF each time the
vehicle ignition is shut off.
File:rcscc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:48:54 1995
101
Features
*[FV00300( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed
for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read
this chapter to find out about standard and
optional features.
%*[FV00400( ALL)01/95] Doors
%*[FV01200(MBC )03/95] Anti-theft front door lock knobs
*[FV01300(MBC )01/95] Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to prevent
unlocking the door by pulling up on the lock
knob. To unlock and open the front door from
inside the vehicle, pull on the inside door
handle.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
102
%*[FV01400( ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)
[FV01600( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, the
controls to lock the doors are on the trim panel
of the front door. When you close the doors
after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked. If the power mechanism fails, the manual
door locks will override the power controls.
Pulling on a front inside door handle will
automatically override and release the front door
lock.
[FV01750( BC )02/95] Power door locks on vehicles equipped with
keyless entry will activate when the interior
courtesy/dome lamps are turned on or off using
the instrument panel dimmer or thumbwheel
control.
[FV02000( BC )05/95]
half page art:0010223-D
The power locks on the driver’s door
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
103
%*[FV02600( BCGV)01/95] Using the Illuminated Entry System
(If equipped)
[FV03150( BC)05/95] The interior lights turn on when you lift the
outside door handle on either front door when
you press UNLOCK, TRUNK, or PANIC on a
programmed remote entry transmitter if your
vehicle is equipped with remote entry.
[FV03200( BCGV)02/95] These lights automatically turn off after 25
seconds or when you turn the ignition key to
ON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off if
you have turned them on manually or if a door
is open.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
104
[FV03210( MBC)01/95] Anti-Theft Alarm System
(If equipped)
[FV03220(MBC )05/95] When armed, this system helps protect your
vehicle against break-ins or theft.
%*[FV03230(MBC )05/95] When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system
triggers and will:
*[FV03240(MBC )05/95] flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and
alarm indicator lamp
[FV03250(MBC )05/95] honk the horn
*[FV03260(MBC )05/95] disable the starting circuit to prevent the
vehicle from being started
[FV03270(MBC )05/95] NOTE: The factory installed Remote Entry
System has a PANIC feature that also
chirps the vehicle horn and flashes the
interior/exterior lamps when the
PANIC button on the remote entry
transmitter is pushed. The PANIC
alarm and the Anti-Theft alarm are two
separate features. Both the anti-theft
alarm and the PANIC feature can be
active at the same time.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
105
[FV03280(MBC )05/95] To tell the difference between a PANIC alarm
and a triggered Anti-theft alarm:
[FV03290(MBC )05/95] only the Anti-Theft alarm will cause the
alarm indicator lamp (located in the center of
the instrument panel) to flash on and off.
[FV03301(MBC )05/95] only the Anti-Theft alarm will disable the
start circuit so that the vehicle can not be
started.
[FV03310(MBC )05/95] the Anti-Theft alarm will not stop by pushing
the PANIC button on the Remote Entry
transmitter.
*[FV03320(MBC )05/95] For more information on the PANIC alarm, see
Remote Entry System in the Index.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
106
%*[FV03330(MBC )05/95]
Arming the system
[FV03340(MBC )05/95] To arm the system, do the following steps in
sequence:
*[FV03350(MBC )05/95] 1. Remove the key from the ignition.
[FV03355(MBC )05/95] At this point, the anti-theft system automatically
monitors the ignition keylock cylinder. If the
lock cylinder is forcibly removed, the anti-theft
alarm system will trigger. To arm the remaining
portion of the system, follow steps 2-4.
*[FV03360(MBC )05/95] 2. Open any door. The alarm indicator light
will start flashing to remind you to arm the
system.
[FV03370(MBC )05/95] 3. Lock the doors by using the power door
lock switch or by pressing the remote entry
transmitter LOCK button.
[FV03380(MBC )05/95] The alarm indicator will now glow steadily.
[FV03390(MBC )05/95] 4. Close all doors. The alarm indicator light
will then remain on steadily for
approximately 30 seconds and then go out.
When the light goes out, the system is
armed.
[FV03400(MBC )05/95] NOTE: Be sure to close all doors completely. If
not, the alarm indicator light will
remain on. Remember, your anti-theft
system is armed only after the alarm
indicator light remains on steadily for
approximately 30 seconds after the last
door is closed, and then goes out.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
107
[FV03410(MBC )05/95] You can also arm the anti-theft system by
following this sequence:
*[FV03420(MBC )05/95] 1. Remove key from ignition.
*[FV03430(MBC )05/95] 2. Close all of the doors.
[FV03445( BC )05/95] 3. Press the remote entry transmitter LOCK
button to lock the doors. The alarm indicator
will come on for 30 seconds to show that the
alarm is arming and then turn off to show
that the alarm has been armed.
*[FV03450(MBC )05/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work with
the factory installed remote entry system. It may
not work with other remote entry systems.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
108
%*[FV03460(MBC )05/95]
Disarming an untriggered anti-theft system
*[FV03470(MBC )05/95] You can disarm the system by:
[FV03480(MBC )05/95] unlocking a door with the key (turn the key
all the way to the end of travel or the system
may not disarm.
*[FV03490(MBC )05/95] using the UNLOCK button of the remote
entry transmitter
[FV03495( BC )05/95] using the keyless entry unlock code on the
keypad
[FV03500(MBC )05/95] if remaining in the vehicle, turn the ignition
switch to ON or ACC
*[FV03510(MBC )05/95]
Triggering the alarm system
*[FV03520(MBC )05/95] The armed system will be triggered if:
[FV03530(MBC )05/95] any door is opened without disarming the
system first (see previous paragraphs)
*[FV03540(MBC )05/95] the trunk lock cylinder is removed, or
*[FV03543(MBC )05/95] NOTE: You can open the trunk with your key
without setting off the alarm.
[FV03547( BC )05/95] the ignition key lock cylinder is forcibly
removed from the steering column.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
109
%*[FV03550(MBC )05/95]
Disarming a triggered system
*[FV03560(MBC )05/95] The alarm can be disarmed by:
*[FV03570(MBC )05/95] unlocking a front door with the key
*[FV03580(MBC )05/95] using the UNLOCK button of the remote
entry transmitter
[FV03581( BC )05/95] using the keyless entry unlock code
*[FV03582(MBC )05/95] NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn
will shut off automatically within 2
minutes 45 seconds after the system is
triggered. It will trigger again if
another intrusion occurs. However, the
starter circuit remains disabled until
the system is disarmed.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
110
%*[FV08030( ALL)02/95] Remote Entry System
(If equipped)
*[FV08036( ALL)03/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you
can lock and unlock the vehicle doors and open
the trunk without using a key. The remote also
has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the
system are located on the hand held
transmitter(s) that came with your vehicle.
*[FV08040( ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to four
transmitters. Your vehicle came with two
transmitters. Additional transmitters can be
ordered from your dealer.
*[FV08045(MBC )02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the
ignition in the OFF position.
[FV08050(MBC )02/95]
one third page art:0001000-A
Remote entry transmitter
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
111
%*[FV08055( ALL)02/95]
Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk
*[FV08060( ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK
button.
*[FV08065( ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK
button a second time within five seconds of
unlocking the driver’s door.
[FV08070(MBC )05/95] To open the trunk, press the TRUNK button.
*[FV08080( ALL)02/95]
Locking the doors
*[FV08085( ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.
*[FV08090(MBC )01/95] If you would like a signal that the doors are
being locked, press the LOCK button again
within five seconds. The doors will lock again,
the horn will beep and the low beam headlamps
and tail lamps will flash.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
112
*[FV08114( ALL)02/95]
Activating the remote personal alarm
*[FV08120( ALL)02/95] If you wish to activate the remote personal
alarm, press the PANIC button. This will honk
the horn and flash the low beam headlamps and
tail lamps for approximately two minutes and
forty-five seconds. You can turn it OFF by
pressing the PANIC button again or by turning
the ignition key to the RUN position.
[FV08125( ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK,
TRUNK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry
system turns on the interior lights for 25
seconds. You can turn these lights off with the
LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the
RUN position. The interior lights will not turn
off if you have turned them on manually or if a
door is open.
%*[FV08725( ALL)02/95]
Replacing the batteries
*[FV08750(MBC )02/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by two
coin type three-volt lithium 2016
batteries (included) that should last for several
years of normal use. If you notice a significant
decrease in operating range, the batteries should
be replaced. Replacement batteries can be
purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
113
*[FV08775( ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remote
entry system can also be affected by
weather conditions (such as very cold
temperatures) or structures around the
vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio
and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating
range will allow you to be up to 33
feet (10 meters) away from your
vehicle.
*[FV08800(MBC )02/95]
quarter page art:0020790-A
Replacing the batteries
*[FV08825(MBC )02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace
the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the
two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE
THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER
APART. When installing the new batteries, be
sure to place the positive (+) side down as
marked. Snap the two halves back together.
%*[FV08850( ALL)02/95]
Replacement/additional transmitters
*[FV08875(MBC )02/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, return the
remaining transmitters to your dealer for
reprogramming of your remote entry system.
This is necessary to prevent further unauthorized
use of the lost transmitter.
*[FV08900(MBC )02/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased from
your dealer (remote entry system will work with
up to four transmitters). Return your existing
transmitters to your dealer so the remote entry
system can be reprogrammed with your new
and existing transmitters.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
114
*[FV08925( ALL)02/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF
THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS
DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE
UNDESIRED OPERATION.
%*[FV08950( ALL)02/95] Windows
%*[FV08980( BCGV)02/95] Using the Power Windows
[FV08990(MBC )03/03] Each door has a power control that opens and
closes the window on that door. The driver’s
door has a master control panel that operates the
windows.
*[FV09050( ALL)01/95] Power windows can only be opened or closed
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position.
*[FV09075(MBCG )05/95] RWARNING
Do not let children play with the power
windows. They may seriously hurt
themselves. Make sure occupants are clear
of the window(s) before closing.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
115
[FV09200( BC )05/95]
half page art:0010233-G
The master controls on the driver’s door
%*[FV13100( BC )02/95] Moon Roof (If equipped)
[FV13200( BC )05/95] You can move the moon roof back to open the
glass panel, or you can tilt it up to ventilate the
vehicle. There is also an intermediate position
between closed and open which can reduce wind
noise at speeds between 30 and 45 miles per
hour (50 and 70 km/h).
*[FV13300( BC )01/95] The rocker type switch is used to open and close
the moon roof. You must press and hold the
switch until the desired position is reached. At
fully open, closed and intermediate positions, the
motor will automatically turn off. Release the
switch at this time to avoid motor damage.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
116
[FV13400( BC )05/92]
two third page art:0010248-C
The switch for the moon roof
[FV13600( BC )07/93] To open the moon roof, press and hold the rear
portion of the switch. The glass panel will move
to the intermediate position and stop. If the rear
of the switch is pressed again the glass panel
will move to the full open position and stop.
[FV13700( BC )07/93] To close the moon roof, press and hold the front
portion of the switch. The glass panel will move
to the intermediate position and stop. Press and
hold the front of the switch again and the panel
will move to the fully closed position and stop.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
117
*[FV13800( BC )01/95] To tilt the moon roof into vent position when
the glass panel is closed, press the front portion
of the switch.
*[FV13900( BC )04/95] To close from vent position, press and hold the
rear portion of the switch.
*[FV14100( BC )01/95] Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail covers
of the moon roof with a clean cloth will help
keep the moon roof working properly.
[FV14200( BC )05/89]
one third page art:0010250-B
The moon roof
*[FV14300( BC )01/95] RWARNING
Do not let children play with the moon
roof. They may seriously hurt themselves.
*[FV14400( BC )01/95] Sliding Shade
*[FV14500( BC )01/95] The moon roof has a sliding shade that you can
manually open or close to block the sun when
the glass panel is shut.
*[FV14600( BC )01/95] To close the sliding shade, pull the shade toward
the front of the vehicle. The shade automatically
opens and locks when the moon roof is opened.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
118
%*[FV15700( ALL)01/95] Seats
%*[FV15710( ALL)04/95] Head Restraints
*[FV15720( ALL)04/95] If you use them properly, head restraints will
help protect your head and neck in a collision.
*[FV15730( ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if you
position it behind your head and not behind
your neck.
*[FV15740( ALL)02/95]
Standard head restraints
*[FV15750( ALL)01/95] You can adjust the head restraints for your
comfort and protection.
[FV15770( ALL)05/92]
one third page art:0010048-C
Adjusting the head restraint
% [FV15800(MBC )06/93] Adjusting Manual Seats
*[FV16000( ALL)02/89] In the front seats, you can move the whole seat
forward or backward or tilt the back of the seat
forward or backward.
[FV16100(MBC )05/92] To move the seats forward or backward:
[FV16200( BCGV)04/95] 1. Find the adjustment bar underneath the front
part of the seat.
[FV16400( BCGV)04/95] 2. Lift the bar to unlatch the seat.
*[FV16600( ALL)04/95] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
119
[FV16700( BCGV)04/95] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its new
position. Make sure the seat locks securely in
place.
[FV16900( BC )07/89]
quarter page art:0010252-A
The front seat adjustment bar
*[FV17100(MBC )02/95] To recline the front manual seats:
*[FV17200( ALL)01/95] 1. On the side of the seat, find the handle for
the recliner.
*[FV17300( ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place.
*[FV17400( ALL)01/95] 3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust
it to the position you want. You can tilt the
seat back or bring it forward.
*[FV17500( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the handle to lock the seat in its new
position.
*[FV17600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback
when the vehicle is moving.
*[FV17700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
120
%*[FV17900(MBC )01/95] Seatback Recline
[FV18100( BC )03/90]
one third page art:0010256-A
Front seatback release levers
*[FV18300( BC )01/95] It is not necessary to use the emergency seatback
release lever for rear seat entry or exit. The
seatback remains unlocked with normal usage
and locks only during emergency stopping, upon
impact, or on steep downhill grades. The inertia
seatback latch will allow the seatback to rotate
approximately 5˚ forward before it locks. The
release is provided only to unlock the seatback
when parked on steep downhill grades or after a
collision.
*[FV18400( BC )05/95] RWARNING
A seatback which is folded forward even
a small degree may not lock properly in
the event of a sudden stop or collision.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
121
%*[FV18500( BCGV)05/95] Using the Power Seats (If equipped)
[FV18600( BC )08/93] If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjust
them in several directions. The controls are on
the side of the seats.
[FV18800( BC )05/95]
half page art:0010258-F
The power controls on the driver’s seat
*[FV18850( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not pile cargo higher than the
seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a
collision or sudden stop.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
122
% [FV19700( BC )03/95] Sport Seat
[FV19920( BC )03/95]
two third page art:0010489-D
Sport seat controls
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
123
%*[FV19950(MBC )03/95] Rear Seat Entry
[FV20000( BC )06/93]
one third page art:0010264-A
Entering the rear seat
[FV20100(MBC )03/95] The rotating boot on the lap belt is designed to
allow rear seat entry/exit. To enter the rear seat:
*[FV20200( BC )01/95] 1. Rotate the safety belt boot rearward.
*[FV20300( BC )01/95] 2. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt.
*[FV20400( BC )01/95] 3. Rotate the safety belt boot forward to allow
use by the front seat passengers.
%*[FV20500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats
*[FV20600( ALL)05/95]
Leather and vinyl
*[FV20650( ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a
soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,
wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner
or a mild soap.
%*[FV20700( ALL)04/95]
Fabric
*[FV20750( ALL)04/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom
or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots
immediately. Follow the directions that come
with the cleaner.
*[FV20775( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a
small, hidden area of fabric. If the
fabric’s color or texture is adversely
affected by a particular cleaner, do not
use it.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
124
%*[FV20800( ALL)01/95] Mirrors
[FV20850(ALL)03/95] You can adjust your rearview mirror in any
direction. The special swivel bracket lets you
move the mirror up or down and from side to
side.
[FV21000(ALL )03/95] RWARNING
Make sure you can see clearly through the
rearview mirror at all times. Do not block
your vision. If you cannot see through the
mirror, it could result in a collision,
injuring yourself and others.
% [FV24100( BCGV)07/93] Adjusting the Dual Electric Remote
Control Mirrors
[FV24200(M C )06/93] The switch for controlling the dual electric
remote control mirrors is located on the driver’s
door.
%*[FV24400( ALL)01/95] Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror
with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
125
[FV24500( BC )03/93]
half page art:0010269-D
The mirror controls on the driver’s door
*[FV24700( ALL)04/95] To adjust the side mirrors:
*[FV24800( ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door
panel.
*[FV24900( ALL)02/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the
selector switch to R or L.
[FV25000( ALL)06/93] 3. Move the knob in the direction of the arrows
for the direction you want to move the
mirror.
*[FV25100( ALL)01/95] 4. Return the selector switch to the middle
position to keep the mirror in place.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
126
[FV28700( ALL)01/89] The Right Side Convex Mirror
[FV28800( ALL)03/90] The side view mirror on the right is a convex
mirror. This mirror gives you a wider view of
the lanes on your right and behind you.
*[FV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The side view mirror on the right makes
objects appear smaller and farther away
than they actually are.
%*[FV28950( ALL)01/95] Sun Visors
%*[FV29100( ALL)05/94] Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun
Visors (If equipped)
[FV29300( ALL)06/93] To turn on the visor mirror light, lift the mirror
cover.
[FV29800( BC )05/92]
one third page art:0010277-B
The mirror on the sun visor
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
127
%*[FV30200(MBC )01/95] Console
[FV30350(MBC )06/93] Your vehicle has a full console. The full console
has the features shown in the illustration below.
[FV30500( BC )03/95]
half page art:0010282-E
The features on the full console
%*[FV32875( ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments
[FV32905( BC )07/93] In addition to the console, your vehicle may
have several small storage compartments:
[FV33000( BCGV)11/94] a glove compartment that locks. Use the
round key to lock and unlock it.
*[FV33100( BCGV)01/95] two map pockets on the panels of the front
doors.
*[FV33300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not put objects on the ledge between
the back seat and the rear window, as
they can become dangerous projectiles and
injure someone.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
128
%*[FV33400( ALL)01/95] Trunk
*[FV33500( ALL)01/95] Opening the Trunk Manually
[FV34000( BC )05/94] The trunk in your vehicle gives you plenty of
room for storage — 15.1 cubic feet (.42 cubic
meters).
%*[FV34600( ALL)03/95] To open and close the trunk from the outside:
[FV34950( BCGV)03/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock on the trunk.
[FV35100( ALL)11/90] 2. Turn the key to the right until the trunk
opens.
[FV35300( ALL)11/90] 3. Remove the key before you close and lock
the lid.
[FV35450( ALL)06/93] 4. Shut the trunk lid completely.
% [FV36200( ALL)03/95] Using the Remote Control for the
Trunk (If equipped)
[FV36500( BC )07/93] With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position, you can use the remote control under
your console armrest to unlock and open the
trunk.
[FV36700( BC )05/95]
quarter page art:0010359-C
The trunk release button located under the armrest
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
129
% [FV47500( ALL)08/93] Positive Location Floor Mat
[FV47600(MBC )08/93] When installing or removing the driver’s side
floor mat you must attach/detach the positive
location grommet from the hook on the floor.
The hook is just forward of the left hand track
of the driver’s seat.
[FV47800(MBC )08/93]
half page art:0010758-A
The positive location floor mat hook
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
130
[FV48000( C )03/95] Decklid Luggage Rack
(If equipped)
[FV48100( C )03/95] NOTE: The factory-installed luggage rack has a
load carrying capacity of 50 lbs.
(23 kg.). Do not exceed this load limit
or cause the vehicle to exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR), which
is shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label.
File:rcfvc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:53:30 1995
131
Electronic Sound Systems
% [AS01100(MBC )05/94]
full page art:0060658-A
Compact Disc Radio
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
132
%*[AS01105(MBC )04/95] Compact Disc Radio
*[AS01175(MBC )05/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic
Stereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player.
[AS01200(MBC )12/94] Using the Controls on Your New Compact
Disc Radio
*[AS01300(MBC )04/95] Most of the features of this unit work for both
radio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobs
and buttons control several different functions,
so be sure to read all of the operating
instructions carefully.
*[AS01400(MBC )04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS01500(MBC )04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.
Press it again to turn it off.
*[AS01600(MBC )04/95]
How to adjust the volume
*[AS01700(MBC )04/95] Press the (+/s) side of the “VOL” button to
increase/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in
the display to show the relative volume level.
*[AS01800(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“POWER” button), the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power is switched back on.
*[AS01900(MBC )04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS02000(MBC )04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band. When in the radio mode,
pushing the button more than once will alternate
between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are
used with the station memory buttons described
under How to tune radio stations.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
133
%*[AS02100(MBC )05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS02200(MBC )04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,
“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or
select the station by using the memory buttons,
which you can set to any desired frequency.
These four methods are described below.
*[AS02300(MBC )04/95] Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually
tune
*[AS02400(MBC )04/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time (FM changes in
increments of 200kHz; AM changes in
increments of 10kHz) by first pressing the
“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows
“TUNE”), then — within approximately five
seconds —pressing and releasing either the
top aor bottom bhalf of the “SEEK”
button. To change frequencies quickly, press
and hold down either the top or bottom half
of the “SEEK” button. While you are
manually tuning, the display will show a
blinking “M”.
*[AS02500(MBC )04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS02600(MBC )04/95] Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS02700(MBC )04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to
automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the top a
half of the “SEEK” button to select the next
listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the bottom bhalf of the button to
select the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By pressing and holding the
button, listenable stations can be passed over
to reach the desired station.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
134
*[AS02800(MBC )04/95] Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan
radio stations
*[AS02900(MBC )04/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once
enters the scan mode (display will indicate
“SCN”). Pushing the top ahalf of the
“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up
the frequency band, stopping on each
listenable station for approximately five
seconds. Pushing the bottom bhalf of the
“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode
down the frequency band, again stopping on
each listenable station for approximately five
seconds.
*[AS03000(MBC )04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”
button again.
*[AS03200(MBC )04/95] Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
*[AS03300(MBC )02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
[AS03350(MBC )05/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS03400(MBC )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS03600(MBC )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS03700(MBC )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
135
*[AS03950(MBC )04/95] Using the Automatic Memory Load feature
*[AS04050(MBC )03/95] If no stations are in memory preset, you can
activate the Auto Memory Load feature by
pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET”
button for approximately three seconds.
Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons
in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking
out the first six strong stations for the
respective band and storing them in memory
buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of
strong stations from the FM band.)
*[AS04150(MBC )04/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can
continually set strong stations into your
memory buttons without losing your existing
memory presets, which is especially handy
while traveling. Your radio will automatically
set your memory buttons to the strong local
stations so you don’t have to continually
manually tune to existing stations.
*[AS04250(MBC )02/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the
“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio
will set the first five strong stations of the
band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the
memory buttons. The display will show
“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies,
stopping momentarily on the stations being
set into the memory buttons. The radio is
now in the “AUTO” mode and this display
will show “AUTO” each time a preset is
activated.
*[AS04350(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong
stations in the frequency band, the
remaining unfilled buttons will store
the last strong station detected on the
band.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
136
*[AS04450(MBC )04/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio
will begin playing the station stored on
memory button 1.
*[AS04550(MBC )04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode
and return to the manually-set memory
button stations (or those stations set using
Auto Memory Load), simply push the
“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show
“AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time Auto
Memory Store is activated on that band, the
radio will store the next set of five strong
stations.
*[AS04600(MBC )02/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
output of your radio
*[AS04700(MBC )04/95] Increasing or decreasing bass response
[AS04750(MBC )05/94] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “BASS”. Push the top (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
bass (more “lows”), and push the bottom (–)
side to decrease bass (less “lows”).
*[AS04800(MBC )04/95] Increasing or decreasing treble response
[AS04900(MBC )05/94] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “TREB”. Push the top (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
treble (more “highs”), and push the bottom
(–) side to decrease treble (less “highs”).
*[AS04950(MBC )04/95] Adjusting speaker balance
[AS05000(MBC )05/94] Balance control allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL”.
Push the top (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and push the bottom (–) side to
shift the sound to the left speakers.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
137
*[AS05100(MBC )04/95] Adjusting speaker fader
[AS05200(MBC )05/94] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE”.
Push the top (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the front
speakers, and push the bottom (–) side to
shift the sound to the rear speakers.
*[AS05300(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
*[AS06800(MBC )04/95] Using the Controls on Your New Compact
Disc Player
*[AS07000(MBC )04/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capable
of playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without an
adapter! The Player operates when the power is
on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle
the disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and
follow all of the care and cleaning instructions
under How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD
Player and Discs.
*[AS07100(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc is
ejected and “ERROR” begins scrolling
in the display, remove the disc and
reinsert it right side up (label side up).
[AS07200(MBC )03/95] The digital display on your CD player will
either show the track (selection) number or the
elapsed time. (The display mode can be selected
by pressing the memory preset button #6.)
Indicators for play b, stop Xand compression
on (“C”) are also in the display. (These features
are described later.)
*[AS07300(MBC )04/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD
player will override that of the radio.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
138
*[AS07400(MBC )04/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and
fader controls on the radio are also
used with the CD player. Refer to
earlier operating instructions on these
controls.
*[AS07500(MBC )04/95]
How to insert a disc and begin play
*[AS07550(MBC )04/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc
opening. When inserted, the disc automatically
loads into the unit and play starts at the
beginning of the first track (selection).
*[AS07600(MBC )04/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player
automatically returns to the beginning of the
disc and resumes playing.
*[AS07610(MBC )02/95]
How to change the track being played
[AS07620(MBC )03/95] Press the top aside of the “SEEK” button to
seek forward to the next track of the disc. If the
button is held and the last track is reached, the
disc player will automatically begin playing the
last track of the disc.
[AS07630(MBC )03/95] Press the bottom bside of the “SEEK” button
to seek the previous track on the disc.
*[AS07650(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc
opening is secured to prevent the
accidental insertion of a second disc.
*[AS07700(MBC )04/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protection
circuitry to protect the laser diode. If
the temperature of the player reaches
167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit
will shut off the player and “TOO
HOT” will scroll in the display for
approximately five seconds (radio will
resume playing). When the temperature
returns to normal operating range, the
CD player will again be operational.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
139
*[AS07750(MBC )04/95]
How to stop and restart the CD player
*[AS07800(MBC )04/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically
enters the play mode and the play indicator a
illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the
“PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button.
The stop indicator Xin the display illuminates
and operation returns to the radio mode. To
resume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP”
button once again.
*[AS07850(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF
during play and then is set to the ON
or ACCESSORY position, the CD
player will resume playing in the mode
it was in when ignition was turned off.
*[AS07900(MBC )05/95]
How to fast forward or reverse your CD
player
*[AS07950(MBC )05/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a
selection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward)
or the “REV” button (to reverse). While either
button is pressed, the disc goes forward or
backward at two different speeds depending on
how long the button is held down. (Pressing
either button for more than approximately three
seconds will speed up the process.) Release the
button at the desired point (found by watching
the elapsed playing time in the display or by
listening to the sound during fast forward or
reverse). When you have reached the beginning
of track 1, the CD player will begin playing.
*[AS08000(MBC )04/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by
keeping the fast forward button pressed, the
display will show “END” and the player will go
into pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP”
button to begin playing the first track of the
disc, press the “REV” button to back up from
the end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” function
to locate a desired track.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
140
*[AS08020(MBC )04/95]
Using the “SCAN” function
[AS08030(MBC )03/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the
scan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top
aor bottom bhalf of the “SEEK” button to
scan forward or reverse, respectively. The CD
player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on
each listenable track for approximately eight
seconds. This continues until you press the
“SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While in
the scan mode, the display shows the current
sampled track number.
*[AS08040(MBC )04/95]
Special features of your CD player
*[AS08050(MBC )04/95] Compression
*[AS08060(MBC )04/95] The compression feature will bring soft and
loud passages closer together for a more
consistent listening level.
*[AS08070(MBC )04/95] To turn the compression on, press the
“COMP” button. When on, the compression
indicator (“C”) will appear in the display.
Press the button again to turn off.
*[AS08080(MBC )04/95] Automatic Disc Storage
*[AS08090(MBC )04/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player but
is not removed from the disc opening within
approximately 10 seconds, the player will
automatically reload the disc for storage,
unless the disc is automatically ejected due to
a “focus error” (disc inserted upside down).
In this case, the disc will not be automatically
reloaded.
*[AS08095(MBC )04/95]
How to eject the disc
*[AS08096(MBC )04/95] Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject the
disc and resume radio operation of your audio
system.
*[AS08097(MBC )04/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radio
power and/or ignition is on or off.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
141
% [AS21350(MBC )02/95]
full page art:0060641-B
Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
142
%*[AS21370(MBC )05/95] Electronic Stereo Cassette Radio
*[AS21400(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS21500(MBC )02/95]
How to turn the radio on and adjust the
volume
*[AS22050(MBC )04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.
Press it again to turn it off.
[AS22060(MBC )04/94] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to increase the volume. Press the left (–)
side of the button to decrease the volume.
Illuminated bars in the display show the relative
volume level.
*[AS22070(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“POWER” button), the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power is switched back on.
*[AS22100(MBC )04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS22250(MBC )02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape
(when in cassette mode). Pushing the button
more than once will alternate between AM, FM1
and FM2. These functions are used with the
station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
[AS22300(MBC )05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS22425(MBC )07/92] There are four ways for you to tune in to a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station by using the Automatic Music Search
(“AMS”) button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to
the station or select the station by using the
memory buttons, which you can set to any
desired frequency.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
143
[AS22450(MBC )05/95] Using the “AMS” function to manually tune
your radio
[AS22650(MBC )03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by first pressing the
“AMS” button, (display shows “TUNE”) then
pressing and releasing either the right aor
left bside of the “SEEK” button. To change
frequencies quickly, press and hold down
either the right or left side of the “SEEK”
button.
*[AS22700(MBC )02/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS22800(MBC )04/95] Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS22900(MBC )04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to
automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the right
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the left (b) side of the button to select
the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach
the desired station.
[AS23150(MBC )05/95] Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS23175(MBC )07/94] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan
mode. The radio will begin scanning up the
frequency band, stopping on each listenable
station for approximately a five-second
sampling. This continues until you press the
“SCAN” button a second time. The display
flashes “AM” or “FM.”
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
144
*[AS23200(MBC )04/95] Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
*[AS23300(MBC )02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
*[AS23400(MBC )02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS23500(MBC )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS23700(MBC )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS23800(MBC )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
[AS23900(MBC )02/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,
the station memory preset buttons will
need to be reset.
*[AS24000(MBC )02/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
output of your radio
*[AS24100(MBC )04/95] Increasing or decreasing bass response
*[AS24250(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s)
side to decrease bass (less “lows”).
*[AS24300(MBC )04/95] Increasing or decreasing treble response
*[AS24450(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
treble (more “highs”), and push the left (s)
side to decrease treble (less “highs”).
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
145
*[AS24500(MBC )08/89]
Speaker features and operation
*[AS24600(MBC )04/95] Adjusting speaker balance
*[AS24750(MBC )02/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift
the sound to the left speakers.
*[AS24800(MBC )04/95] Adjusting speaker fader
*[AS24950(MBC )02/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the front
speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift
the sound to the rear speakers.
*[AS24960(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
*[AS25000(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
*[AS25500(MBC )02/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS25600(MBC )02/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the
right) firmly into the tape door opening, making
sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.”
*[AS25700(MBC )02/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS25800(MBC )02/95] NOTE: The tape track number indicated in the
display does not necessarily correspond
to the tape track or side number on the
cassette label. It is used only to
indicate when the tape mechanism
reverses tracks.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
146
[AS25810( BC )03/95] NOTE: Depending on your vehicle, the display
of your radio may show arrows (g
or h) or numerals (“1” or “2”) to
indicate the direction of tape travel. In
either case, at the end of the tape, the
direction automatically reverses and
plays the other side of the tape.
[AS25825( BC )05/94] Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)(If
your display shows numerals)
*[AS25850(MBC )03/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS”
will appear in the display). Then, push the
left (h) button to rewind to the beginning
of the current selection or press the right
(g) button to fast forward to the beginning
of the next selection.
[AS25900( BC )05/94] Fast forwarding the tape (if your display
shows numerals)
*[AS26000(MBC )03/95] Push the right (g) button to fast forward
the tape.
[AS26100( BC )05/94] Rewinding the tape (if your diplay shows
numerals)
*[AS26200(MBC )03/95] Push the left (h) button to rewind the
tape.
[AS26300( BC )07/92] Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)
(if your display shows arrows)
[AS26400( BC )03/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button. Then,
push the appropriate fast-wind button,
depending upon the direction of the tape
travel arrow in the display. For example, if
the tape travel arrow is pointing to the left,
push the left (h) button to rewind to the
beginning of the current selection. If the tape
travel arrow is pointing to the right, press
the right (g) button to fast forward to the
beginning of the next selection.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
147
[AS26500( BC )07/90] Fast forwarding the tape (if your display
shows arrows)
*[AS26600( BC )03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the fast-wind
button with the arrows pointing in the same
direction as indicated in the display. For
example, if the tape travel arrow in the
display is pointing to the left, press the left
(h) button to fast forward the tape. To
return to the play mode, press the opposite
fast-wind button momentarily, until fast
forward stops.
*[AS26700( BC )07/90] Rewinding the tape (if your display shows
arrows)
*[AS26800( BC )03/95] To rewind the tape, press the fast-wind
button with the arrows pointing in the
opposite direction as indicated in the display.
For example, if the tape travel arrow in the
display is pointing to the left, press the right
(g) button to rewind the tape. To return to
the play mode, press the opposite fast-wind
button momentarily, until rewind stops.
*[AS26900(MBC )02/95] How to change the side of the tape being
played
*[AS27000(MBC )03/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tape
can be selected at any time by pushing both
fast-wind buttons (hand g) at the
same time.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
148
*[AS27100(MBC )02/95]
How to eject the tape
*[AS27250(MBC )02/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing.
*[AS27300(MBC )02/95]
Using the DolbyHB noise reduction feature
*[AS27400(MBC )02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
*[AS27500(MBC )05/95] Push the kbutton to activate. Push again to
deactivate.
*[AS27600(MBC )02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS27700(MBC )02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS27750(MBC )02/95] Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS27800(MBC )02/95] Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
149
*[AS27900(MBC )02/95] Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS28001(MBC )02/95] If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it
before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
*[AS28101(MBC )02/95] Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting a cassette.
*[AS28200(MBC )03/95] Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
player when not in use. High heat in the
vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
150
% [AS43455( BC )02/95]
full page art:0060575-C
High-Level Audio System
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
151
*[AS43458( BC )03/95] High-Level Audio System
*[AS43460(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS43470(MBC )04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS43480(MBC )04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.
Press it again to turn it off.
*[AS43500(MBC )04/95]
How to adjust the volume
*[AS43510(MBC )04/95] Press the +/– side of the “VOLUME” button to
increase/decrease volume. Bars illuminate in the
display to show the relative volume level.
*[AS43520(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“POWER” button), the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power is switched back on.
*[AS43530(MBC )04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS43540(MBC )02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape
(when in cassette mode). Pushing the button
more than once will alternate between AM, FM1
and FM2. These functions are used with the
station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
152
%*[AS43550(MBC )05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS43560(MBC )04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,
“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or
select the station by using the memory buttons,
which you can set to any desired frequency.
These four methods are described below.
*[AS43570(MBC )05/95] Using the “TUNE” function
*[AS43580(MBC )03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time (FM changes in
increments of 200 kHz; AM changes in
increments of 10 kHz) by first pressing the
“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows
“TUNE”), then — within approximately five
seconds — pressing and releasing either the
right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK”
button. To change frequencies quickly, press
and hold down either the right or left side of
the “SEEK” button.
*[AS43590(MBC )04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS43600(MBC )04/95] Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS43610(MBC )04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to
automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the right
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the left (b) side of the button to select
the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach
the desired station.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
153
*[AS43630(MBC )01/95] Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS43640(MBC )03/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once
enters the scan mode (display will indicate
“SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the
“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up
the frequency band, stopping on each
listenable station for approximately a
five-second sampling. Pushing the left (b)
side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan
mode down the frequency band, again
stopping on each listenable station for
approximately a five-second sampling.
*[AS43650(MBC )04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”
button again.
*[AS43670(MBC )04/95] Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
*[AS43680(MBC )02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
*[AS43690(MBC )02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS43700(MBC )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS43720(MBC )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS43730(MBC )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
154
*[AS43750(MBC )04/95] Using the Automatic Memory Load feature
*[AS43760(MBC )03/95] If no stations are in memory preset, you can
activate the Auto Memory Load feature by
pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET”
button for approximately three seconds.
Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons
in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking
out the first six strong stations for the
respective band and storing them in memory
buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of
strong stations from the FM band.)
*[AS43770(MBC )04/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can
continually set strong stations into your
memory buttons without losing your existing
memory presets, which is especially handy
while traveling. Your radio will automatically
set your memory buttons to the strong local
stations so you don’t have to continually
manually tune to existing stations.
*[AS43780(MBC )02/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the
“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio
will set the first five strong stations of the
band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the
memory buttons. The display will show
“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies,
stopping momentarily on the stations being
set into the memory buttons. The radio is
now in the “AUTO” mode and this display
will show “AUTO” each time a preset is
activated.
*[AS43790(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If there are less than five strong
stations in the frequency band, the
remaining unfilled buttons will store
the last strong station detected on the
band.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
155
*[AS43800(MBC )04/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio
will begin playing the station stored on
memory button 1.
*[AS43810(MBC )04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode
and return to the manually-set memory
button stations (or those stations set using
Auto Memory Load), simply push the
“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show
“AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time Auto
Memory Store is activated on that band, the
radio will store the next set of five strong
stations.
*[AS43830(MBC )02/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
output of your radio
*[AS43850(MBC )04/95] Increasing or decreasing bass response
*[AS43860(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s)
side to decrease bass (less “lows”).
*[AS43870(MBC )04/95] Increasing or decreasing treble response
*[AS43880(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
treble (more “highs”), and push the left (s)
side to decrease treble (less “highs”).
*[AS43890(MBC )04/95] Adjusting speaker balance
*[AS43900(MBC )02/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift
the sound to the left speakers.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
156
*[AS44010(MBC )04/95] Adjusting speaker fader
*[AS44020(MBC )02/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the front
speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift
the sound to the rear speakers.
*[AS44030(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
*[AS44040(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
*[AS44050(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
cassette tape player or eject a tape.
[AS44060(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balance
and fader controls in the same manner
as for radio stations.
*[AS44070(MBC )02/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS44080(MBC )02/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with
power loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process. Display
indicates “M” (for metal/CrO
2
) while tape is
playing.
*[AS44090(MBC )02/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded and
stored with the ignition and radio
power off.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
157
*[AS44100(MBC )02/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS44110(MBC )02/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desired
selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.
Following are brief descriptions of each.
*[AS44120(MBC )02/95] Fast forwarding the tape
[AS44140(MBC )02/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will automatically begin
playing until fast forward is manually
stopped (by pushing the “PLAY PROG”
button) or the end of the tape is reached.
*[AS44160(MBC )01/95] At the end of the tape, the direction
automatically reverses and plays the other
side of the tape.
[AS44170(MBC )02/95] Fast rewinding the tape
[AS44180(MBC )02/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will automatically begin playing
when rewind is manually stopped (by
pushing the “PLAY PROG” button) or the
beginning of the tape is reached.
*[AS44190(MBC )01/95] Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette
tape player
[AS44200(MBC )03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape. Push the left
(b) side to seek the beginning of the current
tape selection.
*[AS44210(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currently
playing tape selection, press the left
(b) side of the “SEEK” button after
approximately three seconds into the
current selection.
*[AS44220(MBC )03/95] Whirling sprockets in the display (l)
indicate the direction of tape travel.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
158
*[AS44230(MBC )01/95] Using the “SCAN” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS44240(MBC )03/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the
scan mode (display indicates “SCN”).
Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK”
button will begin the forward scan mode on
the tape currently playing, stopping on each
tape selection for approximately an
eight-second sampling.
*[AS44250(MBC )03/95] Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK”
button will begin the reverse scan mode,
stopping on each previous tape selection for
approximately an eight-second sampling.
While scanning, the display indicates whirling
sprockets plus an “S” (m).
*[AS44260(MBC )02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled tape selection press the
“SCAN/TUNE” button again.
*[AS44270(MBC )02/95] How to change the side of the tape being
played
[AS44280(MBC )02/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected
at any time by pressing the “PLAY/PROG”
button.
*[AS44300(MBC )02/95]
How to eject the tape
*[AS44310(MBC )04/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing if
the radio power is on. The tape cartridge can be
ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or
off.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
159
*[AS44320(MBC )01/95]
How to store the tape
*[AS44330(MBC )03/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape
player and resume radio play. The cassette will
be stored in the tape player and the Xsymbol
in the display will be lit until you push the
“PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fast
forward and fast rewind can be used while the
tape is in storage mode without interrupting
radio play.
*[AS44340(MBC )02/95]
Using the DolbyHB noise reduction feature
*[AS44350(MBC )02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
*[AS44360(MBC )04/95] Push the kbutton to activate Dolby B Noise
Reduction. Push again to deactivate.
*[AS44490(MBC )01/95]
Tape error messages
*[AS44500(MBC )01/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped to
diagnose certain problems you may experience.
Error codes are as follows:
*[AS44510(MBC )02/95] Error 0 — Communication error between the
radio controller and the tape controller. The
cassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tape
again. If the same error code appears, turn the
ignition off, then back on again and insert the
tape.
*[AS44520(MBC )02/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. The
cassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert the
tape again. If the same error code appears in the
display, try a different cartridge.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
160
*[AS44530(MBC )02/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Your
cassette tape player will go into the pause mode.
Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’t
eject, refer the problem to qualified personnel for
service.
*[AS44540(MBC )02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS44550(MBC )02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS44560(MBC )02/95] Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS44570(MBC )02/95] Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS44580(MBC )02/95] Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS44590(MBC )01/95] Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting cassette.
*[AS44600(MBC )01/95] Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the
cassette to warp.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
161
%*[AS60900( ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions
*[AS61000( ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception from
being completely clear and noise-free, such as
the following:
*[AS61100( ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength
*[AS61200( ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly related
to the distance the signal must travel. The
listenable range of an average FM signal is
approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond
this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe
area and the signal becomes weaker.
*[AS61300( ALL)06/90] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna
(whether you have a power antenna or
a manually adjustable antenna) is fully
extended to the maximum length for
proper reception. If your antenna is not
fully extended, you may experience
signal loss while traveling in fringe
reception areas.
*[AS61400( ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain
*[AS61500( ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of
the area over which the signal travels may
prevent the FM signal from being noise-free.
*[AS61700( ALL)01/95] If there is a building or large structure between
the antenna and station, some of the signal
“bends” around the building, but certain spots
receive almost no signal. Moving out of the
“shadow” of the structure will allow the station
to return to normal.
*[AS61800( ALL)01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or
structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal
signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and
distortion. Cancellation effects are most
prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can
become quite severe in hilly terrain and
depressed roadways.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
162
*[AS61900( ALL)01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono
blend circuit has been incorporated into this
system. This feature automatically switches a
weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,
which improves the quality of reception.
*[AS62000( ALL)01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions
on AM frequencies. These can be caused by
power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and
thunderstorms.
*[AS62100( ALL)01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal
Capture and Overload. This can occur when
listening to a weak station and when passing
another broadcast tower. The close station may
capture the more distant station, although the
displayed frequency does not change. While
passing the tower, the station may switch back
and forth a few times before returning to the
original station.
*[AS62200( ALL)01/95] When several broadcast towers are present
(common in metropolitan areas) several stations
may overload the receiver, resulting in
considerable station changing, mixing and
distortion.
*[AS62300( ALL)01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM
and FM bands has been incorporated into this
system to reduce strong signal capture and
overload.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
163
%*[AS62400( ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies
*[AS62500( ALL)01/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
establishes the frequencies that AM and FM
radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The
allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600,
1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7,
107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.
*[AS62600( ALL)01/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given
area. This radio will tune to each of these
frequencies using MANUAL TUNE and no fine
tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use
other frequencies.
*[AS62700( ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a
“rounded-off” frequency which is not the
frequency they actually broadcast on. For
example, a radio station that is assigned a
frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”
even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM
broadcast frequency.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
164
%*[AS62800( ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service
Information
*[AS62900( ALL)07/90] Warranty
*[AS63000( ALL)03/95] Your sound system is warranted for three years
or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever
comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty
booklet for further information. Ask your dealer
for a copy of this limited warranty.
*[AS63200( ALL)07/90] Service
*[AS63300( ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio
systems with a comprehensive service and repair
program. If anything should go wrong with
your Ford audio system, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of
qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist
you.
File:rcasc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:32 1995
165
Driving Your Cougar
%*[DR00500( ALL)03/93] Driving with an Automatic
Overdrive Transmission
[DR00510(MBC )05/94] The gearshift lever is floor mounted.
*[DR00700( BCGV)01/95] The automatic overdrive transmission operates
very much like a regular automatic transmission,
except it offers the extra overdrive feature.
%*[DR00800( ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
*[DR00950( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
Hold the brake pedal down while you
move the gearshift lever from position to
position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move
unexpectedly and injure someone.
[DR00965(MBC )03/95] To move the shifter out of P (Park), the ignition
key must be turned to either the OFF or the ON
position and the thumb button must be pushed
in. This vehicle is also equipped with the brake
shift interlock safety feature which prevents
shifting the transmission out of the P (Park)
position without the brake pedal being
depressed if the key is in the ON position.
*[DR00975( ALL)03/95] To operate:
*[DR00980( ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.
*[DR00985( ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
*[DR00990( ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
166
%*[DR00995( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift
Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the
gearshift from being moved from the P (Park)
position until the brake pedal is depressed. This
feature is active when the ignition is in the ON
position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be
moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal
depressed:
*[DR01000( ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition
key.
*[DR01005( ALL)01/95] 2. Apply parking brake.
*[DR01010( ALL)01/95] 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise
to the first position (OFF).
*[DR01020( ALL)01/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift
lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.
*[DR01025( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL
YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS
ARE WORKING.
[DR01027( ALL)05/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the
alternate procedure described above, it is
possible that a fuse has blown and that your
brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Cougar
in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking
and replacing fuses.
[DR01030(MBC )05/94] The console-mounted gearshift will lock in
P (Park) when you turn the key to the LOCK
position. When the gearshift is in any position
except P (Park), the ignition key cannot be
turned to LOCK or removed from the steering
column. TO REMOVE THE KEY, the gearshift
lever must be in P (Park).
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
167
% [DR01300( BC )03/93]
half page art:0010307-F
The positions of the console-mounted gearshift
*[DR01500( ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desired
position, release the brake pedal and use the
accelerator as necessary.
%*[DR01700( ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)
*[DR01800( ALL)02/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,
the vehicle will move backward. You should
always come to a complete stop before shifting
into or out of R (Reverse).
*[DR01830( ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)
[DR01860( ALL)05/94] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transmission
are not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even
on the slightest incline, unless the parking brake
or brakes are on.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
168
%*[DR01900( ALL)01/95] Driving
[DR01940( BC )07/93] Your vehicle’s gearshift is console-mounted on the
floor. The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) is
located on the gearshift handle. The Transmission
Control Indicator Light (O/D OFF) is located on
the instrument panel. You can put the gearshift
lever in any of the several positions.
[DR01951(MBC )03/95] The OVERDRIVE OFF light is off (not
illuminated) during normal vehicle operation.
This allows the transmission to upshift and
downshift from 1st through 4th gears. When the
TCS is pressed, the Transmission Control
Indicator Light will illuminate (O/D OFF) on the
instrument panel. When this O/D OFF is
illuminated the transmission will upshift and
downshift from 1st through 3rd gears.
[DR01957( ALL)11/94] If the O/D OFF light does not come “on” when
the TCS is depressed or if the light “FLASHES”
when you are driving, have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition
persists, damage could occur to the transmission.
*[DR01961( BCGV)01/95] To return the transmission to normal operation
(1st through 4th gear) depress the TCS again.
This switch may be used to cancel overdrive any
time the vehicle is being driven. Each time your
vehicle is started, the overdrive system will
automatically be in the normal overdrive mode
and the light will not be illuminated.
%*[DR02010(MBC )01/95]
When to use D (Overdrive)
*[DR02100( ALL)01/95] Overdrive is the usual driving position for an
automatic overdrive transmission. It works the
same way Drive works, automatically upshifting
or downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows.
*[DR02200( ALL)01/95] However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourth
gear —an overdrive gear — when your vehicle
cruises at an appropriate consistent speed for
any length of time. This fourth gear will increase
your fuel economy when you travel at cruising
speeds.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
169
[DR02500(MBC )05/95]
When to use D (Overdrive) — with
transmission control switch activated (O/D
OFF light illuminated)
*[DR02600(MBC )01/95] Overdrive may not be appropriate for certain
terrain. If the transmission shifts back and forth
between Third and Fourth gears while you are
driving on hilly roads or if your vehicle does
not have adequate power for climbing hills,
depress the TCS.
*[DR02605( BCGV)01/95] You can depress the TCS at any speed.
*[DR02610( ALL)01/95]
When to use 2 (Second)
*[DR02620( ALL)01/95] Use 2 (Second) for start-up on slippery roads or
to give you more engine braking to slow your
vehicle on downgrades.
*[DR02700( ALL)01/95]
When to use 1 (Low)
*[DR02800( ALL)03/95] Use 1 (Low) when driving down steep grades. It
gives more engine braking to slow your vehicle
than 2 (Second) on the downgrades. You can
upshift from 1 (Low) to 2 (Second) or from
1 (Low) to Overdrive at any speed.
*[DR03000( ALL)01/95] P (Park)
*[DR03100( ALL)01/95] Always come to a complete stop before you shift
into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park). This locks the
transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
rotating.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
170
*[DR03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
*[DR03225( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running.
*[DR03400(MBC )01/95] You can tell a console-mounted gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park) if the lever is
adjacent to the P (Park) and you cannot move it
without pushing in the thumb button.
% [DR09720( ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Axle (If equipped)
[DR09730( ALL)12/91] This axle provides added traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a
poor traction surface. Under normal conditions
the Traction-Lok axle functions as a standard
rear axle.
*[DR09740( ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tires
on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of
effectiveness does not affect normal driving and
should not be noticeable to the driver.
*[DR09750( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
171
%*[DR09760( BCGV)03/95] Traction Assist
TM
(If equipped)
*[DR09770( BCGV)01/95] Your vehicle may be equipped with the optional
Traction Assist
TM
system. This system helps
prevent wheel spin in order to improve tire
traction and is an especially useful feature when
you drive in hilly areas or on slippery, icy or
snowy roads.
*[DR09780( BCGV)03/95] Traction Assist
TM
works automatically by rapidly
applying and releasing the brakes to prevent one
or both of the rear drive wheels from spinning
during acceleration.
*[DR09782( BC )01/95] The Traction Assist
TM
system can be manually
turned off, to allow wheelspin if you want, by
pushing the TRACTION ASSIST. switch (located
on the console) when the vehicle is not in the
Traction Assist
TM
mode. The word “OFF” in the
switch will light up to indicate the system is off.
The Traction Assist
TM
system will automatically
be on each time the engine is started. During
ordinary driving, it is recommended to leave the
system turned on. The Traction Assist
TM
system
will then always be ready to operate when
needed.
[DR09783( BC )03/94]
one third page art:0011288-A
The Traction Assist
TM
switch
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
172
[DR09785( BCGV)03/95] During the Traction Assist
TM
function, which
most often occurs during low speed acceleration
on slippery surfaces, a noise may be heard
coming from the engine compartment. This noise
is created by the ABS pump and is normal and
may last for a few seconds during the
acceleration of the vehicle.
*[DR09790( BCGV)03/95] In general, this system improves your vehicle’s
stability and acceleration performance when road
conditions warrant. Traction Assist
TM
is fully
effective up to approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). At 25 mph (40 km/h) the function
begins to taper off until it no longer operates
above 34 mph (55 km/h).
[DR09793( BCGV)01/95] If the Traction Assist
TM
system is cycled
excessively, the system will shut down to
prevent the rear brakes from overheating.
During this shutdown period, the word OFF in
the traction assist switch will be illuminated
showing that the traction assist system is
inoperative. A cooling down period is required
to prevent damage to the rear brakes. This time
period varies and depends on brake usage
during the cooling down period. Anti-Lock
braking is not affected and will function
normally during the cool down period.
[DR09795( BCGV)05/95] NOTE: Traction-Lok axles are not an available
option on vehicles equipped with
traction assist.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
173
*[DR09800( ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle
%*[DR09900( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power
steering uses energy from the engine to help
steer your vehicle.
%*[DR09950( ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer your
vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have
the power steering system checked. If the power
steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually
but it takes more effort.
*[DR10000( ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme
right or left for more than five seconds if the
engine is running. This can damage the power
steering pump.
[DR10200( BCGV)12/94] Speed Sensitive Power Steering
(If equipped)
[DR10401( BC )06/94] The steering system in 4.6L engine vehicles is
speed sensitive. This means that the steering
effort is light for parking and heavier for
highway driving. However, if you have to
swerve around an object or another vehicle, your
steering will have full power assist.
%*[DR10500( ALL)03/95] Brakes
%*[DR10600( ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes
[DR10650( ALL)01/95] Braking non ABS models
[DR10900( C )03/93] Your vehicle has power front disc brakes and
rear drum brakes. Anti-lock disc brakes on all
four wheels are optional. They adjust
automatically as the brake pads or linings wear
down.
*[DR11100( ALL)04/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the
“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal
with a steadily increasing force. This allows the
wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing
down, which lets you steer properly.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
174
[DR11300( ALL)03/95] On vehicles without anti-lock brakes, extreme
braking can make the wheels lock and slide,
possibly decreasing your control of the steering.
If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal
and repeat the “squeeze” technique.
[DR11310( ALL)05/95]
Braking with ABS brakes
[DR11400( ALL)03/95] On vehicles with anti-lock brakes, the wheels
will not lock and slide when you press down
hard on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brakes
automatically start releasing and reapplying the
front brakes independently and the rear brakes
together whenever your wheels start to lock. Do
not “pump” the brake pedal on vehicles
equipped with anti-lock brakes. When this
happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulse.
This “pulse” may be an unfamiliar feeling but it
is normal and indicates the ABS is working as
designed.
*[DR11650( ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase
your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor
damage may also eventually occur.
*[DR11700( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do
not apply your brakes continuously. If
you apply your brakes continuously,
they may overheat and become less
effective.
%*[DR11800( ALL)03/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate
stops does not affect the function of the brake
system and is normal. However, if the squeal
becomes louder or more frequent, have your
brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
175
[DR11900( ALL)05/94] Ford Motor Company has not found any
detrimental effects of popular mobile radio
transmitting equipment installed on vehicles
with the anti-lock brake system, if the equipment
is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. However, if mobile radio
transmitting equipment is installed in your
vehicle and, if either the anti-lock brake system
cycles or the check anti-lock light comes on at
any time other than right after you turn the key
to ON or during a sudden stop, have your
mobile radio dealer inspect the installation.
%*[DR12000( ALL)03/95] Parking Brake
*[DR12050( ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used whenever
you park your vehicle.
[DR12500( BCGV)03/95] The parking brake pedal is suspended just below
the bottom of the instrument panel to the left of
the brake pedal.
[DR12900( BC )03/95] To set the parking brake while parking your
vehicle, apply the brake pedal with your right
foot and hold it while you push the parking
brake down firmly with your left foot. The brake
system warning light will glow.
[DR13500( BC )03/95]
one third page art:0010315-A
The parking brake
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
176
*[DR13800( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
[DR14050( BC )03/95] To release the parking brake, press down on the
pedal until you hear a click. Lift your foot off
the pedal. The brake is now released and will
reset to lock the next time you press the pedal,
located below the lower left corner of the
instrument panel. The Brake System Warning
Light will glow if the parking brake is not fully
released when the engine is running.
*[DR14200( ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light each
time you start your engine. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.
*[DR14300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the Brake System light remains on, have
the brakes checked immediately. They
may not be working properly.
[DR14400( ALL)07/93] The parking brake system is designed for static
parking only and is not designed to stop a
moving vehicle, but you can use the parking
brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if
the normal brakes fail. However, since the
parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the
stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely
affected.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
177
*[DR14500( ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions
%*[DR14600( ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving
*[DR14700( ALL)03/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and
handle differently from your previous vehicle.
Use care until you become accustomed to its
various features and driving characteristics.
*[DR14800( ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.
Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or
combinations of these maneuvers can cause a
vehicle to behave differently than anticipated.
%*[DR15200( ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather
%*[DR15300( ALL)01/95]
Slippery roads
*[DR15400( ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:
*[DR15500( ALL)03/95] Do not quickly move the steering wheel
unless necessary.
*[DR15600( ALL)01/95] Drive slower than you normally would.
[DR15700( ALL)03/95] Do not use speed control.
*[DR15800( ALL)01/95] Give your vehicle more distance to stop.
*[DR15900( ALL)03/92] Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to
avoid locking your wheels. (Does not apply
to vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)
*[DR16000( ALL)02/93] Consider using one of the lower gears.
*[DR16200( BCGV)01/93] RWARNING
To avoid skidding and losing control on
slippery roads, do not downshift into First
(1) when you are moving faster than
20 mph (32 km/h).
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
178
*[DR16225( ALL)03/95] RWARNING
If your vehicle has speed control, do not
use it on slippery roads. You could lose
control of your vehicle and could injure
someone.
[DR16300(MBC )03/92] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud
or snow), you may try to “rock” it out of the
spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward
and reverse gears. At the same time, press
lightly on the accelerator.
*[DR16400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
[DR16500( ALL)12/94] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,
you may gain enough momentum to move out
of the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. This may overheat the
engine, damage the transmission, or damage the
tires. If you are still stuck after a minute or two
of rocking, call for a tow truck.
%*[DR16700( ALL)01/95]
High water
*[DR16800( ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you
are sure that the water is below the bottom of
the wheel rims.
*[DR16900( ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. You may have limited traction or wet
brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because
your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.
*[DR17000( ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,
apply your brakes gently several times as your
vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the
brakes.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
179
%*[DR17100( ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load
*[DR17200( ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight your
vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of
your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers
and cargo, should never be more than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight
that your vehicle carries over the front axle and
rear axle should never be more than the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective
axle.
% [DR17300( ALL)05/94] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on
the left front door lock facing or the door latch
post pillar.
*[DR17400( ALL)01/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect
the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of
replacement tires with higher weight limit than
originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.
Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may
lower GVWR and GAWR limitations.
*[DR17500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged
or you may lose control and injure
someone.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
180
%*[DR17503( ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load
*[DR17506( ALL)01/95] The load that you add to your vehicle must not
exceed the maximum load stated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Decal attached to the
left front door pillar.
*[DR17509( ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add
the weights of:
*[DR17512( ALL)01/95] the driver and passengers
*[DR17515( ALL)01/95] luggage and any other items that you put in
your vehicle
*[DR17518( ALL)01/95] the tongue load of the loaded trailer
*[DR17521( ALL)01/95] the weight of any equipment that has been
added to your vehicle since it was delivered
to your dealer
*[DR17524( ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of these
items, use the following procedure to figure the
weight of a load:
*[DR17527( ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,
passengers and luggage. You might take
your vehicle to a shipping company or an
inspection station for trucks.
*[DR17530( ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,
passengers and luggage.
*[DR17533( ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second to
figure the total weight of the load.
*[DR17536( ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also make
sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus
the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,
make sure that the weight your vehicle carries
over each axle is less than the GAWR for the
respective axle.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
181
*[DR17539( ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo
from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle
exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load
or remove cargo accordingly.
*[DR17542( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Improper distribution of your vehicle’s
load or carrying weight in excess of the
amount shown on the tire decal can cause
rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.
%*[DR17550(MBC )04/95] Trailer Towing
*[DR17650( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factory
fully equipped to tow. No towing packages are
available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealers.
*[DR17700( ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on
your vehicle, you must follow certain
precautions for your safety and the good of your
vehicle:
*[DR17800( ALL)01/95] Stay within the load limits for towing your
vehicle. (See Trailer towing specifications in this
chapter.)
*[DR17900( ALL)01/95] Carefully and thoroughly prepare your
vehicle for towing, making sure to use the
right equipment and to attach it properly.
(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)
*[DR18000( ALL)01/95] Use extra caution when driving your vehicle
while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in
this chapter.)
*[DR18100( ALL)01/95] Service your vehicle more frequently if you
tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you
tow in this chapter.)
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
182
*[DR18175( ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should
be on the tongue. However, the tongue load
should never exceed 10% of the maximum
weight that your vehicle can safely tow.
*[DR18250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not tow a trailer when the temporary
spare tire is being used.
[DR18300( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing
vehicle. The amount of weight that you can
safely tow depends on the optional equipment
on your vehicle. See the following chart.
% [DR18400( ALL)03/90]
Trailer towing specifications
[DR18600( BC )03/95]
six pica chart:0010654-D
*[DR20900( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow
*[DR21000( ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of your
vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of
trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing
equipment is properly attached to your vehicle.
If you are not certain that you are using the
right equipment in the proper manner, see your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[DR21100( ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto your
vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to
bear the load.
*[DR21125( ALL)01/95] Always check the pressure in all your vehicle’s
tires when preparing to tow (see inflation
recommendation on the tire label).
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
183
%*[DR21150( ALL)01/95]
Using the hitch
*[DR21200(MBC )01/95] Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Because
this type of hitch places the tongue load of a
trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, you
must distribute the load in your trailer so that
only 10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer
is on the tongue.
*[DR21600( ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift and
change the weight on the hitch. This will
prevent damage to your vehicle and make your
vehicle easier to handle.
%*[DR21650( ALL)01/95]
Connecting the safety chains
*[DR21700( ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your
vehicle. They help protect your trailer if the
hitch breaks.
*[DR21800( ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains:
*[DR21900( ALL)01/95] 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue
and attach them to your vehicle’s frame or
hook retainers. Never attach the safety
chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper
is not designed to bear the weight of a
trailer.
*[DR22000( ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack in
the chains to allow you to turn corners.
*[DR22100( ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions
that the rental agency gives you.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
184
%*[DR22150( ALL)01/95]
Connecting the trailer’s brakes
*[DR22200( ALL)01/95] Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or
surge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them according
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that
your trailer’s brakes meet local and federal
regulations.
[DR22250( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, provisions have been made
under the instrument panel for installation of an
electronic brake controller.
*[DR22300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake
system directly to your vehicle’s brake
system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances
of having a collision greatly increase.
%*[DR22350( ALL)01/95]
Connecting the trailer’s lights
*[DR22400( ALL)01/95] Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system
wiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting system
wiring. To get the proper equipment for
hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your local
trailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to
follow their instructions carefully.
[DR22450( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, the proper lamp wiring and
equipment has been installed at the factory. The
trailer feed wire (supplied in a box in the
luggage compartment) needs a connector
compatible with your trailer prior to installation.
*[DR22500( ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you
may cause damage to the vehicle’s lighting
system.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
185
%*[DR22600( ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow
*[DR22650( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when driving while you
tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on
hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can
brake gradually.
[DR22950(MBC )09/93] If you tow in Overdrive while riding through
hilly country, your vehicle may frequently shift
between Overdrive and Third gears. To prevent
your vehicle from shifting too much, depress the
Transmission Control Switch (TCS). This will
also give the engine more power going up hills
and better engine braking going down hills.
%*[DR23000( ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you are
towing on very long, steep grades, the speed
control may shut off.
*[DR23100( ALL)01/95]
Servicing your vehicle if you tow
*[DR23200( ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your
vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently
than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and
Record booklet for additional information.
File:rcdrc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:47:03 1995
187
Roadside Emergencies
%*[RE00400( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle
*[RE00450( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the
lights on or any electrical equipment on after
you turn the engine off. If this happens, you
may be able to jump-start from a booster battery
to start your vehicle.
*[RE00500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
The gases around the battery can explode
if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit
cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
*[RE00600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
To protect yourself when charging a
battery, always shield your face and eyes.
Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.
%*[RE00700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Applying too much pressure on the ends
when lifting a battery could cause acid to
spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or
with your hands on the opposite corners.
%*[RE00800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns
skin, eyes, and clothing.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
188
*[RE00900( ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or
clothing, immediately flush the area with water
for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the
acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water
first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or
vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.
*[RE01000( ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,
and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these
directions for preparing your vehicle to jump-start
and connecting the jumper cables in the order they
are given. If in doubt, call for road service.
*[RE01100( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle
[RE01150( ALL)11/90] NOTE: also see label on battery.
*[RE01200( ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so
you need to use a 12-volt jumper system.
You will damage your starting motor,
ignition system, and other electrical parts if
you connect them to a 24-volt power supply
(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt generator set).
*[RE01300( ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s
electrical system.
*[RE01400( ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of
the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles
do not touch each other. Set the parking
brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the
engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
*[RE01500( ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any
excessive corrosion before you attach the
jumper cables.
*[RE01600( ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles.
Turning on the fan helps protect the
electrical system from voltage surges. Turn
off all other switches and lights in both
vehicles to prevent possible damage to either
vehicle’s electrical systems.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
189
%*[RE01700( ALL)05/95]
Connecting the jumper cables
*[RE01800( ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery. (You can connect either jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you
use the same cable for both positive
terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red
cable and a black cable. The red cable is
generally used for the positive terminals and
the black for the negative ones.
*[RE01900( ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery.
*[RE02000( ALL)03/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the
negative (s) terminal of the booster battery
— NOT to the discharged battery.
[RE02100( ALL)01/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a
good metallic surface on the engine or frame
of the disabled vehicle making sure it is
clear of any rotating engine components. The
following illustrations show where you can
find a metallic surface.
*[RE02200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (s) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause
an explosion of the gases that surround
the battery.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
190
[RE02500( BC )05/95]
full page art:0010334-D
The 3.8L SFI engine
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
191
[RE02650(MBC )05/95]
full page art:0010666-G
The 4.6L SFI Engine
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
192
*[RE02900( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting
*[RE03000( ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in
the way of moving engine parts, then start
the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a
moderate speed.
*[RE03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few
minutes and then start the disabled vehicle.
It may take a couple of tries before the
vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start
after several attempts, there may be a
different problem.
*[RE03200( ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them
idle for a few minutes to charge the
discharged battery.
%*[RE03300( ALL)03/95]
Removing jumper cables
*[RE03400( ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order. Remove the negative (s) end
of the jumper cable from the metallic surface
on the engine or frame of the disabled
vehicle.
*[RE03500( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the
booster battery.
*[RE03600( ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the
booster battery.
*[RE03700( ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)
cable from the discharged battery.
*[RE03800( ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while
to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.
Drive it around for a while with all electrical
accessories turned off to let the battery recharge.
You may need to use a battery charger to fully
recharge the battery.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
193
[RE03820( BC )05/94] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 4.6L
engine you will need to perform
additional steps after your vehicle has
been jump started. See Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance Testing in
Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.
%*[RE03900( ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire
*[RE04000( ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do
not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off
the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on
the hazard flashers.
%*[RE04100( ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire
[RE04225(MBC )03/94] You have a high pressure temporary spare tire.
This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire and
is designed for emergency use only. Use it only
when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon
as you can. This spare tire is marked with the
words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you
can easily identify it.
*[RE04250( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Extended use of other than
conventional spare tires on a
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness.
This loss of effectiveness does not
affect normal driving and should not
be noticeable to the driver.
*[RE04300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
If you use the temporary spare tire
continuously or do not follow these
precautions, the tire could fail, causing
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly
injuring yourself or others.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
194
*[RE04400( ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,
DO NOT:
*[RE04500( ALL)01/95] exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any
circumstances.
*[RE04600( ALL)01/95] load your vehicle so that it is heavier than
the maximum vehicle load rating listed on
the tire decal.
*[RE04700( ALL)01/95] tow a trailer.
*[RE04800( ALL)01/95] use tire chains on this tire.
*[RE04900( ALL)01/95] try to repair the temporary spare tire or
remove it from its wheel.
*[RE05000( ALL)01/95] use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.
*[RE05100( ALL)01/95] drive through an automatic car wash with
this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is
smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces
the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get
caught in the rails and it could be damaged.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
195
%*[RE05500( ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location
[RE05600( ALL)11/90] The spare is stored in the trunk.
[RE05900( BC )11/93]
two third page art:0010339-F
The spare tire location
%*[RE06500( ALL)02/95] To remove the spare tire:
*[RE06600( BC )01/95] 1. Remove the spare tire cover.
*[RE06700( BC )01/95] 2. Unscrew the wing-nut holding down the
spare tire.
*[RE06750( BC )01/95] NOTE: Wing-nut is not removable.
[RE06800( BC )12/91] 3. Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
196
%*[RE07300( ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire
*[RE07525( BCGV)03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move
or roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set the
parking brake and block the wheel that is
diagonally opposite the tire that you are
changing.
[RE07550( BCGV)05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground,
the transmission alone will not prevent the
vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,
even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent the
vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be
sure the parking brake is set, then block the
wheel (both directions) that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
*[RE07560( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
*[RE07875( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
*[RE07900( ALL)05/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.
[RE08000( BC )11/92] 3. Remove any optional wheel covers or
hubcaps with the tapered end of a wheel nut
wrench. Insert the handle of the wrench and
twist it against the inner wheel cover flange.
For more about removing wheel covers, see
the information later in this chapter.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
197
*[RE08100( ALL)01/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove them
until the tire is raised off the ground. You
should pull up on the handle rather than
push to develop maximum force to loosen
wheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel Lug
Nuts later in this chapter for information on
removing anti-theft lug nuts.
%*[RE08150( ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire
[RE08250( BC )12/94] 1. Find the underbody notches closest to the
wheel to be removed. Center the jack
between (2) underbody notches and turn the
handle of the jack clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
*[RE08400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start
the engine when your vehicle is on the
jack. The jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
198
[RE08550( ALL)10/92]
half page art:0010759-A
The improper lift point
[RE08570( ALL)05/92] NOTE: Never use the differential housing as a
lift point.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
199
% [RE08600( BC )02/92]
half page art:0010346-C
The notches for the jack
*[RE08900( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the
wheel clears the ground. Remove the wheel
lug nuts.
*[RE08920( ALL)01/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure that the air valve stem is facing
outward.
*[RE08940( ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the
wheel is snug against the hub. The beveled
edges on the lug nuts face inward. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the
vehicle. If you do, you could force the
vehicle off the jack.
*[RE08960( ALL)02/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
200
*[RE08980( ALL)01/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown in the following
illustration. As soon as possible, have your
dealer or a qualified service technician check
the lug nuts for proper torque specifications.
% [RE09100( ALL)03/93]
quarter page art:0010350-A
The lug nuts on the wheel
[RE09400( ALL)01/95] 7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the
trunk.
*[RE09500( ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make
sure the jack is securely fastened so it does
not rattle when you drive.
*[RE09600( ALL)03/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.
% [RE10600(MBC )12/94] Aluminum Road Wheel Ornaments
(If equipped)
[RE10700(MBC )03/93] To remove the ornament, stick the tapered end
of the jack handle between the ornament and
wheel and pry off the ornament.
[RE10800(MBC )03/93] To replace the ornament, stick one side of the
ornament into the center of the wheel and strike
the other side with the palm of your hand.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
201
%*[RE10900( BC )02/95] Center Wheel Cover
[RE11000(BC )02/95] To remove the wheel cover:
[RE11100( BC )03/91] 1. Pry the center ornament from the wheel
cover using the tapered end of the jack
handle. Do not use a screwdriver or any
other tool. If you do, you may damage the
cover. The wheel, with the wheel cover still
attached, may now be removed from the
vehicle by removing the five lug nuts.
[RE11300( BC )03/91] 2. If the tire needs to be removed from the
wheel, remove the five screws, using a
Phillips head screwdriver. Then pull the
wheel cover off the wheel.
[RE11400( BC )05/92]
half page art:0010353-B
The center attachment wheel cover
[RE11500(BC )02/95] To replace the wheel cover:
[RE11600( BC )03/91] 1. Place the tire valve stem hole in the wheel
cover over the tire valve stem. Align the
holes in the wheel cover mounting pad with
the center holes in the metal inserts. Install
and tighten the five screws.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
202
[RE11700( BC )03/91] 2. Align the legs of the ornament with the slots
on the wheel cover. Strike the ornament with
the palm of your hand.
%*[RE12700(MBC )03/95] Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)
*[RE12800( BC )01/95] If your vehicle has this option, one of the lug
nuts on each wheel locks and must be unlocked
with a special key. The key and registration card
are attached to the lug wrench and stored with
the spare tire. If you lose the key, send the
registration card to the manufacturer (not the
dealer) to get a replacement key.
*[RE12850(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut key
assembly is lost, see your nearest Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer who has
access to a master set of keys.
*[RE12875(MBC )03/95] DO NOT USE A POWER IMPACT WRENCH
ON THE LUG NUT KEY.
[RE13000(MBC )03/95]
quarter page art:0010357-B
The anti-theft lug nut and key
*[RE13100(MBC )03/95]
Removing the anti-theft lug nut
*[RE13300(MBC )03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make
sure that you hold the key square to the lug nut.
If you hold the key on an angle, you may
damage the key and the lug nut.
*[RE13400(MBC )03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key
and apply pressure on the key with the wrench.
Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction
to remove the lug nut.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
203
*[RE13500(MBC )03/95]
Replacing the anti-theft lug nut
*[RE13600(MBC )03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place the
lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, while
applying pressure on the key, install the lug nut.
*[RE13800( ALL)02/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does
Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
*[RE13810( ALL)04/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch
*[RE13900( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you
have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off
switch is a device that stops the fuel pump
when your vehicle has been involved in a
substantial jolt.
*[RE14000( ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset the
fuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off
switch in the Index.
%*[RE14100( ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle
*[RE14201( ALL)05/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact
a professional towing service or, if you are a
member, your roadside assistance center.
Recommended towing options include wheel lift
towing or flat bed towing.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
204
*[RE14300( ALL)05/95]
three fourths page art:0001463-A
*[RE14400( ALL)05/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator
what kind of vehicle you have. A towing
manual is available from Ford Motor Company
for all authorized tow truck operators. Have
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for
the proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
File:rcrec.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:41 1995
205
Customer Assistance
%*[HS00205( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance
*[HS00210( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,
seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators
that put you in touch with the help you need if
you experience a problem with your vehicle.
This complimentary service is provided to you
throughout your warranty period of 3
years/36,000 miles (3 years/60,000 km),
whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside
Assistance coverages beyond this period,
through Ford Auto Club, contact your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer (not available in
Canada).
*[HS00215( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:
*[HS00220( ALL)06/94] Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.
*[HS00225( ALL)06/94] Jump-start your battery if it is dead.
*[HS00230( ALL)06/94] Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.
*[HS00235( ALL)06/94] Bring you fuel if you run out.
*[HS00240( ALL)06/94] Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even
non-warranty related tows, like accidents or
getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered
(some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing and repossession).
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
206
*[HS00245( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance
*[HS00250( ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card can
be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your
glove compartment. Complete the card and place
it in your wallet for quick reference.
*[HS00255( ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United
States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call
1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00260( ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside
assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain
information about reimbursement call
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00300( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem
*[HS00400( ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service
your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how
to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
207
%*[HS00500( ALL)03/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns
(U.S. or Canada)
*[HS00600( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your
selling dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction. You may, however, take
your vehicle to any authorized Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your
dealer will be able to resolve your concern.
*[HS00700( ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you
received from your dealership’s service
department, talk to the service manager at the
dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to
the owner or general manager of the dealership.
In most cases, you will have your concern
resolved at this level.
*[HS01000( ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs to be serviced, or if you need more help
than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford
Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealership that may be able to help.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
208
*[HS01025( ALL)04/95] In the U.S., contact:
%*[HS01050( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0060100-E
*[HS01100( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
%*[HS01150( ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0060101-C
*[HS01200( ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available
when contacting Ford Customer Assistance:
*[HS01300( ALL)04/95] your telephone number (both business and
home)
*[HS01400( ALL)04/95] the name of the dealer and the city where the
dealership is located
*[HS01500( ALL)04/95] the year and make of your vehicle
*[HS01550( ALL)04/95] the date purchased
*[HS01600( ALL)03/95] the current mileage on your vehicle
%*[HS01700( ALL)03/95] your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
listed on your owner card and/or your
vehicle ownership license
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
209
[HS01800( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0010630-A
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)
*[HS02200( ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,
you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement
Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.
%*[HS02300( ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board
(U.S. Only)
*[HS02400( ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,
independent dispute-settlement program
available free to owners or lessees of qualifying
Ford Motor Company vehicles.
*[HS02500( ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be
available in all states. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures and/or to
discontinue this process at any time without
notice and without incurring obligations.
*[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board
Review?
*[HS02700( ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance and
service complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln
Cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks under
warranty that have not been resolved by a
dealer or Ford Motor Company.
*[HS02750( ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:
*[HS02800( ALL)01/95] A non-Ford product
*[HS02900( ALL)01/95] A non-Ford dealership
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
210
*[HS03100( ALL)01/95] A vehicle sales transaction
*[HS03200( ALL)01/95] A request for reimbursement of consequential
expenses unless incidental to a service or
product complaint being reviewed
*[HS03300( ALL)01/95] Items not covered by your warranty
*[HS03400( ALL)01/95] Alleged liability claims
*[HS03450( ALL)01/95] Property damage where such damage is
significant when compared to the economic
loss alleged under the warranty dispute
*[HS03500( ALL)01/95] Cases currently in litigation
*[HS03600( ALL)01/95] Vehicles not used primarily for personal,
family, or household purposes
*[HS03650( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on
which applicable express written new
vehicle warranties have expired at
receipt of your application are not
eligible. Eligibility may differ
according to state law. For example, see
the unique brochure for California
purchasers/lessees.
*[HS03700( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?
*[HS03800( ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:
*[HS03900( ALL)04/95] three consumer representatives
*[HS04000( ALL)04/95] a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer
*[HS04200( ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership are
recruited and trained by an independent
consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of
their business leadership qualities.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
211
*[HS04300( ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and
36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty
start date), you have a right to make an oral
presentation before the Board by indicating your
choice on the application. Also, oral
presentations may be requested by the Board. A
decision is made by the Board by simple
majority vote.
[HS04320( ALL)06/93] Board members review all the materials related
to each complaint and, based on the available
information, arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Decisions are based on the written
statements and any oral presentations made by
each of the involved parties.
*[HS04400( ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a
month, some cases will take longer than 30 days
to be reviewed. The Board will make every
effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it
receives the customer application form.
*[HS04500( ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board
will mail you its decision in writing. It will also
provide you with a form to indicate your
acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The
decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer
and Ford, but customers may have other options
available to them under state or federal law.
*[HS04600( ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be
introduced into evidence by any party in
subsequent legal proceedings that may be
initiated.
*[HS04700( ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?
*[HS04800( ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address to
request a brochure/application. You will be sent
a brochure and a one-page customer application
form. The form should be completed and mailed
to the same address.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
212
*[HS04900( ALL)02/93]
one inch art:0060102-B
*[HS05100( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?
*[HS05200( ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it is
determined to be eligible, you will receive an
acknowledgment indicating the file number
assigned to your application and the local Board
address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford
Motor Company representative are asked to
submit statements.
*[HS05300( ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs
the following information:
*[HS05400( ALL)04/95] legible copies of all documents and
maintenance or repair orders that relate to
the case
*[HS05500( ALL)04/95] the year, make, model, and vehicle
identification number
*[HS05600( ALL)04/95] the date you bought your vehicle
*[HS05700( ALL)04/95] the date of repair and the mileage at the time
of repair
*[HS05800( ALL)04/95] the current mileage
*[HS05900( ALL)04/95] the name of the dealer who sold you the
vehicle or who serviced your vehicle
*[HS06000( ALL)04/95] a brief description of your unresolved
complaint
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
213
*[HS06100( ALL)05/95] a brief summary of actions that were taken
with the dealer and Ford Motor Company
*[HS06200( ALL)05/95] the names (if known) of all people you
contacted at the dealership
*[HS06300( ALL)04/95] a description of the action you want done to
resolve your concern.
*[HS06305( ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,
an explanation will be mailed to you.
%*[HS07400( ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Only)
*[HS07500( ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor
Company.
*[HS07600( ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford
Motor Company.
*[HS07700( ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or
366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
214
%*[HS08700( ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance
*[HS08800( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
*[HS08900( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
*[HS09000( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0060101-C
%*[HS09100( ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP)
*[HS09200( ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a
solution cannot be reached between a vehicle
owner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of its
dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the
owner may wish to use the services offered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP).
[HS09300( ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial
Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings.
However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s
dispute resolution process as outlined under
“Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or
Canada)” earlier in this chapter.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
215
*[HS09400( ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information
about the program can obtain an information
booklet from your dealer or contact the
Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address or
telephone number shown below.
*[HS09500( ALL)05/95] O & P Services
595 Bay Street — Suite 300
Toronto, Ontario
M5G 2C2
Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685
[HS09600( ALL)05/95] This plan is not available in the province of
Quebec.
%*[HS09700( ALL)05/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.
and Canada
*[HS09800( ALL)05/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy
or consulate to make sure local regulations do
not prevent you from registering your vehicle.
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide
whether you should import your vehicle to that
country.
*[HS09900( ALL)05/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you
where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get
unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an
anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle
needs, contact a district or owner relations office
before you leave the U.S. or Canada.
*[HS10000( ALL)05/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a
proper conversion may damage the effectiveness
of your emissions control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any
damage that is caused by use of improper fuel.
*[HS10100( ALL)05/95] You may also have difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
216
*[HS10200( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Central or South America,
the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, write to:
*[HS10300( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0060103-H
*[HS10400( ALL)05/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, they can direct you to the appropriate
Ford affiliate office.
*[HS10500( ALL)05/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,
register your Vehicle Identification Number and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations.
File:rchsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:46:04 1995
217
Accessories
*[AC00200( ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle
*[AC00240( ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available from
your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its
finishes. For best results, use the following, or
products of equivalent quality:
*[AC00280( ALL)04/95]
fourteen pica chart:0001204-B
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
218
*[AC00300( ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available
through your local authorized dealer. These fine
accessories have been engineered specifically to
fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom
designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built
vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from
high quality materials and meets or exceeds
Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.
That is why Ford brand accessories are
warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles
(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your
dealer for complete warranty information and
accessory availability.
*[AC00350( ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience
[AC00430( BC )03/94]
fourteen pica chart:0010542-K
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
219
[AC00550( C )03/95]
sixteen pica chart:0011338-A
*[AC01400( ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers, and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label). Consult your dealer for specific
weight information.
[AC01500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) or in Canada the
Canadian Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulates the use
of mobile communications systems —
such as two-way radios, telephones,
and theft alarms — that are equipped
with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with FCC regulation
and should be installed only by a
qualified technician.
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
220
*[AC01600( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use or are not
properly installed. For example, when
operated, such systems may cause the
engine to stumble or stall. In addition,
such systems may themselves be
damaged or their operation affected by
operating your vehicle. (Citizens band
[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,
and other transmitters whose power
output is 5 watts or less will not
ordinarily affect your vehicle’s
operation.)
*[AC01700( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the
installation, design, or manufacture of
such systems, Ford cannot assume
responsibility for any adverse effects or
damage that may result if you use this
equipment.
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
222
% [AC02400( C )12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011326-A
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
223
[AC02500( C )12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011327-A
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
224
[AC02600( C )12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011328-A
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
225
[AC03300( CG )12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011335-A
File:rcacc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:48 1995
227
Servicing Your Cougar
%*[SV00300( ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy
*[SV00400( ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.
*[SV00550( ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do not
need to be serviced.
*[SV00600( ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as
easy as possible. To help you:
*[SV00700( ALL)01/95] We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in
the engine compartment so that you can find
them easily.
*[SV00800( ALL)01/95] When possible, we design parts — such as
the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced
without tools.
*[SV00900( ALL)05/94] We give you a Maintenance Schedule that
makes tracking routine service for your
vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is
located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet.
*[SV01000( ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that
you need to check and service regularly.
*[SV01100( ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your
dealership can provide the parts and service
required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet
to find out which parts and services are covered.
Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this
Owner Guide.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
228
*[SV01250( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that the
Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be
performed for the proper operation of your
vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in
the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any
unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that
your vehicle may need service. If you do notice
something unusual, see that your vehicle is
serviced promptly.
*[SV01275( ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,
and service parts conforming to Ford
specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and
built to provide the best performance in your
vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is
your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in
your vehicle.
%*[SV01400( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
%*[SV01600( ALL)03/95] Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle
*[SV01700( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or
servicing your vehicle. Here are some general
precautions for your safety:
%*[SV01800(MBC )03/95] Do not work on a hot engine. The engine
cooling fan may come on unexpectedly.
Always turn the engine off and let it cool.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
229
*[SV01850(MBC )05/95] RWARNING
The cooling fan is automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
*[SV01900( ALL)03/95] If you must work with the engine running,
avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that
could get caught in moving parts. Take
appropriate precautions with long hair.
*[SV02000( ALL)01/95] Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed
space with the engine running, unless you are
sure you have enough ventilation.
*[SV02100( ALL)01/95] Never get under a vehicle while it is
supported by a jack only. If you must work
under a vehicle, use safety stands.
*[SV02200( ALL)01/95] Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking
materials away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
*[SV02600(MBC )03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must
“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle
will drive properly. To find out how the engine
does this, see Battery in this chapter.
*[SV02800( ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine off:
*[SV03000( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park).
*[SV03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you
turn the engine off.
*[SV03150( ALL)03/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
230
*[SV03200( ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine on:
*[SV03400( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park).
*[SV03501( ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
*[SV03600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
Do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
%*[SV03650( ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood
[SV03800( ALL)03/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
located under the lower left corner of the
instrument panel.
[SV04000( ALL)03/95] 2. Go around to the front of the vehicle, and
release the auxiliary catch that is located
under the front edge of the hood at the
center of the vehicle.
[SV04070( BC )05/95]
one third page art:0010537-A
The auxiliary catch under the front edge of the hood
*[SV04200( BCGV)01/95] 3. Lift the hood until the counterbalanced
hinges hold it open.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
231
*[SV04400( BCGV)01/95] Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely.
*[SV04450( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at
six-month intervals to maintain smooth
and trouble-free operation.
%*[SV04600( ALL)05/95] Engine Compartment
*[SV04700(MBC )09/93] Your vehicle has one of these types of engines:
[SV05075(MBC )03/95] a 4.6 liter SFI engine
[SV05100(MBC )03/93] a 3.8 liter SFI engine
*[SV05300(MBC )11/94] The following pages show diagrams of each
engine type and where to find items that you
should regularly service.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
232
[SV05600( BC )03/93]
full page art:0010327-C
A 3.8 liter SFI engine
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
233
[SV05750( BC )05/95]
full page art:0010665-G
A 4.6 liter SFI engine
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
234
%*[SV05850( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine
*[SV06000( ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because a
buildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,
keeping the engine warmer than usual.
*[SV06020( ALL)05/95] Extreme care must be used if a power washer
is used to clean the engine. The high pressure
fluid could penetrate sealed parts and
assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.
*[SV06040( ALL)04/95] In order to avoid possible cracking of the
engine block or fuel injection pump, do not
spray a hot engine or injection pump with
cold water.
*[SV06060( ALL)04/95] The alternator, distributor and air intake must
be covered. Covering these components will
help prevent water damage.
*[SV06080( ALL)04/95] Never wash or rinse the engine while it is
running. Water getting into the engine may
cause internal damage.
%*[SV06100( ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank
*[SV06240(MBC )05/95] The fuel door is outside the car on the passenger
side near the back. To fill the fuel tank:
[SV06550( ALL)05/95] 1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove
the cap carefully and slowly by turning it
counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
[SV06650( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The fuel system may be under pressure. If
the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you
hear a hissing sound while disengaging
the fuel cap, wait until it stops before
completely removing the cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or
others.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
235
[SV06700( ALL)05/95] 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel
filler pipe before pumping the fuel.
[SV06800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of
your vehicle, clean it off immediately.
The fuel may dull or soften the paint
if you do not wash it off.
[SV06850( ALL)05/95] 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you
are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until
it is tight. It will click when it is fully
tightened.
[SV06875( ALL)05/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed.
[SV06900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with a
Motorcraft or equivalent fuel cap. If you
do not use the proper fuel cap, the
pressure in the fuel tank can damage the
fuel system or cause it to work improperly
in a collision, endangering you and your
passengers.
[SV06950( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an
aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer
warranty may be void for any damage
to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.
[SV07500( ALL)05/95] Choosing the Right Fuel
[SV07600( ALL)05/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle.
Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law.
Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle is
damaged because you used the wrong fuel.
[SV07701( ALL)05/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle
more responsive and maintain its good fuel
economy and emissions. It should not be
necessary to add any aftermarket products to
your fuel tank if you continue to use a
high-quality fuel.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
236
[SV08750( ALL)05/95]
Octane recommendations
[SV08800( ALL)05/95] Your engine is designed to use fuel with an
octane rating of 87. In most cases it is not
necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating
higher than 87. At service stations, the octane
rating is displayed in a label on the pumps.
[SV08900( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0060001-C
[SV09100( ALL)05/95] Using a fuel with a lower octane rating can
cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can
damage the engine.
[SV09200( ALL)05/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when
you accelerate. However, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician if persistent heavy
knocking occurs because this can damage the
engine.
[SV09350( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle has problems with starting, rough
idle or hesitation problems when the engine is
cold, it may be caused by fuel with low
volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the
condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
[SV09800( ALL)05/95]
Gasolines for clean air
[SV09900( ALL)05/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are required
to contain oxygenates to improve air quality.
Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol
(blended at no more than 10%), methanol or
wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with
cosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyl
tertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than
15%).
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
237
[SV09950( ALL)05/95] Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain
areas of the U.S. These fuels are designed to
further reduce emissions from your vehicle.
[SV10000( ALL)05/95] Generally, you should not experience difficulties
operating your vehicle on fuels containing
oxygenates. We encourage you to use these
fuels.
[SV10185( ALL)05/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive
Fuels
[SV10195( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury
or death if misused or mishandled. To
minimize the risk that you will be
injured, please read the following
information carefully and observe the
recommended precautions.
[SV10197( ALL)05/95] Turn vehicle off when refueling
[SV10199( ALL)05/95] Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels are
extremely flammable.
[SV10201( ALL)05/95] Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.
[SV10205( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Gasoline or gasoline blended with
methanol can cause blindness and
possible death when swallowed. If any
fuel is swallowed, call a physician or
poison control center immediately.
[SV10209( ALL)05/95] Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.
[SV10211( ALL)05/95] If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with
soap and water.
[SV10225( ALL)05/95] If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact
lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15
minutes, and seek medical attention.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
238
[SV10227( ALL)05/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small
amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.
Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors
has caused cancer in laboratory animals.
[SV10230( ALL)05/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or
other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of
alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a
gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same
kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic
beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness could result. Consult
a physician promptly if you experience an
adverse reaction.
[SV11300( ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel
[SV11350( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
modern powertrain components.
[SV11500( ALL)05/95] You may need to crank the engine several times
before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from
the tank to the engine.
[SV11600( ALL)05/95] Calculating Fuel Economy
[SV11700( ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of
your vehicle, and can be calculated as Miles Per
Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers
(L/100K).
[SV11750( ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during your
vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an
accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle
will normally use.
[SV11800( ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:
[SV11900( ALL)05/95] 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the
initial odometer reading.
[SV12000( ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel, record the
amount (in gallons or liters) purchased.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
239
[SV12100( ALL)05/95] 3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tank
and record the final odometer reading.
[SV12200( ALL)05/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel
economy:
[SV12250( ALL)05/95] English: MPG = (Total miles driven) V
(gallons used)
[SV12275( ALL)05/95] Metric: L/100k = (liters used) V(100
kilometers)
[SV12300( ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Estimates
[SV12400( ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from
laboratory tests under simulated road conditions
and may not reflect the actual conditions you
experience or your style of driving. The EPA
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that
you will achieve the fuel economy shown.
[SV12650( ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:
[SV12700( ALL)05/95] Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance
[SV12800( ALL)05/95] Rapid acceleration and excessive speed
[SV12850( ALL)05/95] Driving with your foot on the brake
[SV12900( ALL)05/95] Sudden stops
[SV12950( ALL)05/95] Extended engine idling
[SV13000( ALL)05/95] Using speed control in hilly terrain
[SV13100( ALL)05/95] Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear
window defroster and other accessories
[SV13200( ALL)05/95] Underinflated tires
[SV13300( ALL)05/95] Heavy loads
[SV13400( ALL)05/95] Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or
luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
240
*[SV13510( ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers
*[SV13520( ALL)01/95] If you choose to do your own fueling, you
should also perform a few simple maintenance
routines. This extra effort will save you
additional money and contribute to the driving
efficiency of your vehicle.
*[SV13530( ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tire
gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield
washer fluid.
*[SV13540( ALL)01/95] Check the engine oil at every refueling stop
*[SV13550( ALL)01/95] Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and
headlights
*[SV13560( ALL)01/95] Check windshield washer fluid
*[SV13570( ALL)02/95] Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges
*[SV13580( ALL)01/95] Check the tire pressure at least monthly
%*[SV13600( ALL)03/95] Engine Oil Recommendations
*[SV13610( ALL)04/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an
equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification
ESE-M2C153-E and displaying the American
Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on
the front of the container.
*[SV13650( ALL)03/95]
one third page art:0060021-E
The API Certification Mark
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
241
*[SV13670( ALL)01/95] Never use:
*[SV13680( ALL)01/95] “Non-Detergent” oils
*[SV13690( ALL)04/95] Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG
%*[SV13700( ALL)01/95] Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments
or engine treatments
%*[SV13702( ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are
PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the
best engine performance, fuel economy and
engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F
(-25˚C).
%*[SV13703( ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and
of the preferred viscosity may be used in your
engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be
changed according to the maintenance schedule.
%*[SV13775( ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil
*[SV13800( ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil is
important for safe engine operation, check the oil
using the dipstick each time you put fuel in
your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
parked on level ground.
%*[SV13900( ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:
*[SV14000( ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up
and allow a few minutes for the engine oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
*[SV14025( BCGV)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
*[SV14100( ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine
heat.
*[SV14200( ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in
yellow) and carefully pull it out of the
engine.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
242
*[SV14300( ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into
position, making sure it is fully seated.
[SV14350(MBC )03/95]
one inch art:0011218-A
Engine oil dipstick — 4.6 liter engines
[SV14450(MBC )03/95]
one inch art:0000970-A
Engine oil dipstick — 3.8 liter engines
*[SV14500( ALL)03/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the
oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, add
engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is
beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage
or high oil consumption may occur and
some oil must be removed from the engine.
*[SV14600( ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is
fully seated.
*[SV14800( ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil
changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED
engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your
vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if
engine damage is caused by the use of improper
engine oil.
*[SV15000( ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap
highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the
filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the
opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.
Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
243
%*[SV16300( ALL)01/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter
*[SV16400( ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per the
following, whichever occurs first.
*[SV16500( ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0060618-C
*[SV16800( ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet for additional information.
%*[SV16900( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
*[SV17275( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Continuous contact with USED motor oil
has caused cancer in laboratory mice.
*[SV17285( ALL)05/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and
water.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
244
%*[SV17300( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant
%*[SV17400( ALL)03/95] Checking the Engine Coolant
*[SV17500( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.
*[SV17600( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING
The cooling fan is automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
%*[SV17800( ALL)05/94] Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from
overheating in the summer and from freezing in
the winter. Check the level of the coolant at least
once a month. Simply look at the engine coolant
reservoir located in the engine compartment. To
locate the reservoir, see the diagram of your
vehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in this
chapter.
*[SV17850( ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entire
cooling system from internal passageway
corrosion and these additives lubricate the water
pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted
in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
245
[SV18000( BCGV)05/94]
half page art:0010761-C
The engine coolant recovery reservoir
%*[SV18600( ALL)11/94]
Checking hoses
*[SV18700( ALL)11/94] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and
hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and
loose hose clamps as specified in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet. Repair or replace
with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.
*[SV18800( ALL)01/95]
Adding engine coolant
*[SV18900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not put engine coolant in the container
for the windshield washer fluid.
*[SV18950( ALL)05/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or
antifreeze could make it difficult to see through
the windshield.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
246
[SV19000(MBC )05/95] RWARNING
Never remove the radiator cap or vent
plug while the engine is running or hot.
[SV19030( ALL)05/95] Follow these steps to avoid personal injury that
can be caused by escaping steam or engine
coolant.
[SV19040(MBC )03/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine
off and let it cool. Even when the engine is
cool, be careful when you remove the
radiator cap or vent plug.
[SV19145( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick towel
around the cap and turn it slowly
counterclockwise to unscrew.
*[SV19150( ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.
[SV19160( ALL)12/94] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has
been released, use the cloth to press the cap
down, turn it, and remove it.
*[SV19170(MBC )03/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot
steam may blow out or hot engine coolant
may even splash out.
*[SV19190( ALL)03/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixture
your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill
capacities for fluids in the Index.
% [SV19200( ALL)12/94] Add engine coolant only to the recovery
reservoir. If the coolant level is low, add a 50/50
or appropriate mixture of water and the type of
engine coolant that Ford specifies. You may add
water by itself only in an emergency, but you
should replace it with a 50/50 or appropriate
mixture as soon as possible.
*[SV19300( ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling
system for leaks if you have to add more than a
quart (liter) of engine coolant more than once a
month.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
247
*[SV19350( ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an
optimized formula that will protect all metals
and rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for
four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not
necessary and not recommended to use
supplemental coolant additives in your gasoline
powered vehicle. These additives may harm
your engine cooling system. Follow the
recommended service interval for changing your
engine coolant.
*[SV19450( ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add engine
coolant, it is important to maintain
your engine coolant concentration
between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%
(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local
climate conditions. Below 40% you will
lose freeze protection and above 60%
your engine may overheat on a warm
day.
[SV19460( ALL)12/94] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may
void your warranty for the engine
cooling system. Use only a premium
nationally recognized brand name
engine coolant. Do not use alcohol,
methanol antifreeze or engine coolant
mixed with alcohol or methanol
antifreeze. If you do not use the proper
coolant, the aluminum radiator on your
vehicle will corrode.
*[SV19470( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the
Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process
and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled
engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine
coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet
Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
248
%*[SV19480( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
*[SV19500( ALL)03/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid
E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)
or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford
Specification ESE-M97B44-A.
*[SV19550( ALL)01/95] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make sure
that the coolant will not freeze at the
temperature level in which you drive during
winter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolant
in your engine that has a protection rating of at
least -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection rating
is appropriate for the climate in which you live.
%*[SV20100( ALL)04/95]
Engine coolant drain and flush
*[SV20200( ALL)11/94] Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain
and flush of the cooling system can be found in
the Car Service Manual. Following these
recommended procedures will ensure that the
specified coolant level and a 50/50 or
appropriate mixture of coolant and water is
maintained.
%*[SV20300( ALL)02/95]
Engine coolant refill procedure
*[SV20400( ALL)01/95] When the entire cooling system is drained and
refilled, the following procedure should be used
to ensure a complete fill:
*[SV20450( ALL)05/95] NOTE: It is imperative the following
procedure be adhered to. Failure to do
so could result in damage to your
engine.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
249
[SV20500(MBC )03/95] 3.8L engine only
[SV20601(MBC )03/94] Open the vent plug.
[SV20700(MBC )03/93] Remove coolant recovery reservoir cap.
[SV20801(MBC )03/93] Remove radiator pressure cap.
[SV20900(MBC )05/94] With the engine off and cool, add a 50/50
mixture of recommended cooling system fluid
and water to the radiator until full, then add
to the reservoir until the reservoir is at the
FULL-HOT level.
[SV21000(MBC )12/91] Close the vent plug.
[SV21100(MBC )03/93] Reinstall the coolant recovery reservoir cap
by installing the cap to the fully installed
position.
[SV21110(MBC )03/93] Reinstall the pressure cap to the pressure
relief position by installing the cap to the
fully installed position, and then backing off
to the first stop.
[SV21200(MBC )03/93] Start and idle engine until the radiator upper
hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is
open and coolant is flowing through the
entire system).
[SV21300(MBC )03/93] Immediately shut off engine. Cover cap
completely with a thick cloth and cautiously
remove radiator pressure cap and add a
50/50 mixture of recommended coolant and
water until system is full.
[SV21400(MBC )03/91] Reinstall the radiator cap securely.
[SV21500(MBC )05/94] Remove the cap from the engine coolant
recovery reservoir and add a 50/50 mixture
of recommended cooling system fluid and
water to the FULL-HOT mark on the engine
coolant recovery reservoir. Check that
reservoir hose is not kinked.
[SV21800(MBC )03/93] Reinstall the reservoir cap.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
250
*[SV21900(MBC )05/95] Check for leaks at the draincock, block plug
and vent plug.
*[SV22000(MBC )03/95] Recheck the engine coolant level, using the
recommended procedure, after one or two
occasions of vehicle use.
[SV22010( BC )05/95] 4.6L engine only
*[SV22014( ALL)03/95] With the engine OFF and cool, remove the
pressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.
Remove the heater hose and clamp, located
on the rear of the intake manifold.
*[SV22021( ALL)03/95] Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water to the coolant reservoir. Refer to Refill
Capacities later in this chapter for the correct
amount. Add coolant to the reservoir until
the coolant continuously flows out of the tube
in the rear of engine. Reattach hose and
secure clamp.
[SV22026( ALL)03/95] Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolant
is at the FULL COLD level.
*[SV22031( ALL)05/95] Reinstall the pressure cap to the fully
installed position.
*[SV22036( ALL)05/95] Start and idle the engine until the radiator
upper hose is warm (this indicates the
thermostat is open and coolant is flowing
through the entire system).
*[SV22041( ALL)03/95] Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.
Cautiously remove the pressure relief cap and
add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water until the coolant is at the COLD FILL
level in the coolant reservoir.
*[SV22046( ALL)03/95] Reinstall the pressure cap securely.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
251
*[SV22050( ALL)03/95] Check for leaks at the draincock.
*[SV22055( ALL)03/95] Recheck the engine coolant level, using the
recommended procedure, after one or two
occasions of vehicle use.
%*[SV22090( ALL)03/95] Battery
*[SV22100( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery. When the original
equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it
may be replaced by a Motorcraft
Low-Maintenance Battery.
*[SV22130( ALL)02/95] The Low-Maintenance Battery has removable
vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and
for adding water, if necessary. The electrolyte
level should be checked at least every 24 months
or 24,000 miles (40 000 km) in temperatures up
to 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperatures
above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level in
each cell up to the level indicator. Do not
overfill.
*[SV22145( ALL)02/95] If the level gets low, you can add tap water to
the battery, provided the water isn’t hard or
doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content.
However, if possible you should refill the battery
with distilled water. If the battery needs water
quite often, have the charging system checked
for a possible malfunction.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
252
%*[SV22160( ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment
*[SV22175( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that
used lead-acid batteries be returned to an
authorized recycling facility for disposal.
*[SV22190( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0000983-A
Battery recycling symbol
%*[SV22194( BCGV)03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically
controlled by a computer, some control
conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. If you ever disconnect the battery or
install a new battery, you must allow the
computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before
your vehicle will drive properly. To let the
engine do this, put the gearshift in P (Park), turn
off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Let
the engine idle for at least one minute. (Engine
must be warm in order to “learn.”) Also, allow
approximately 10 miles (16 km) of stop and go
traffic for your vehicle’s engine to completely
“relearn” its idle.
[SV22197( BC )12/94] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 4.6L
engine you will need to perform
additional steps after the battery has
been disconnected, jump started or
replaced. See Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance Testing in
Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
253
%*[SV22200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and
Wipers
%*[SV22250( ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid
[SV22300( ALL)12/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid
periodically, or when the optional lamp indicates
low fluid. The reservoir for washer fluid is
located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment. Visual inspection can determine if
the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate the
washer when the reservoir is empty.
[SV23000( BC )12/91]
one third page art:0010375-B
The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid
*[SV23400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not put windshield washer fluid in the
container for the engine coolant.
%*[SV23500( ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washer
fluid rather than plain water, because specially
formulated washer fluids contain additives that
dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such
as methanol should be used in freezing weather
(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local
regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common
antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
254
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection
without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,
wiper blades, and windshield washer system.
%*[SV23600( ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades
*[SV23700( ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice
a year. Also check them whenever they seem
less effective than usual. Substances such as tree
sap and some hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness
of wiper blades.
*[SV23800( ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both
the windshield and the wiper blades. Use
undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do
not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will
damage your blades.
*[SV23900( ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply
turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn
your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a
vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF
position. Do not move the wipers manually.
Manually moving the wipers across the
windshield may damage them.
*[SV24000( ALL)03/01]
Wiper blade replacement
*[SV24100( ALL)03/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properly
after you clean them, you may need to replace
the wiper blade assembly or the blade element.
When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade
refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part
or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the
instructions that come with them.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
255
%*[SV24200( ALL)03/95] Tires
*[SV24300( ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel
tank. If one tire looks lower than the others,
check the pressure in all of them. Always follow
these precautions:
*[SV24500( ALL)03/95] Keep your tires inflated to the recommended
pressures.
*[SV24600( ALL)02/95] Stay within the recommended load limits (see
Load limits in the Index).
*[SV24700( ALL)02/95] Make sure the weight of your load is evenly
distributed.
*[SV24800( ALL)10/89] Drive at safe speeds.
*[SV24900( ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tires
may fail or go flat.
*[SV24950( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying
posted speed limits.
*[SV25000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Driving at very high speeds for extended
periods of time may result in damage to
vehicle components.
%*[SV25200( ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in all
your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an
accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire
pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least one hour or has
been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can
find proper cold pressure and load limits of
recommended size tires on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
256
*[SV25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, possibly
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
%*[SV25500( ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation
*[SV25600( ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires
perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly
and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the
following diagram.
*[SV25700( ALL)01/95] For tire rotation intervals, see the Maintenance
Schedule. If you notice that the tires wear
unevenly, have them checked.
[SV26050( C )03/93]
half page art:0011087-B
Rotating the tires
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
257
%*[SV26500( ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires
*[SV26600( ALL)01/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. When
your tire shows a wear band, it has only
1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left.
% [SV26700( ALL)05/94]
one inch art:0001318-A
A worn-out tire
*[SV26800( ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,
you may need to replace them before a wear
band appears across the entire tread. Some spots
wear more heavily than others.
*[SV26850( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
When replacing full size tires, never mix
radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use
only the tire sizes that are listed on the
tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires
are the same size, speed rating, and
load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire
combinations recommended on the decal.
If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and
safely.
*[SV27100( ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your
vehicle’s original tires may also affect the
accuracy of your speedometer.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
258
%*[SV28100( ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades
*[SV28200( ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their
Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded
into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality
Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has
set.
*[SV28250( ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic
tires for use on passenger cars. They do not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires
with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined in Title 49
Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
*[SV28300( ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford to give you the
following information about tire grades exactly
as the government has written it.
%*[SV28399( ALL)01/95] Treadwear
*[SV28400( ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
259
*[SV28499( ALL)01/95] Traction A B C
*[SV28500( ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests
and does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
*[SV28599( ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C
*[SV28600( ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
260
%*[SV28700( ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains
*[SV28800( BCGV)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads
that provide traction in rain or snow. However,
during the winter months in some climates, you
may need to use snow tires and occasionally
chains for your tires.
*[SV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Snow tires must be the same size and
grade as the tires you currently have on
your vehicle.
*[SV29000( ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or
if the law requires them where you live. If you
choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be
aware of the following:
*[SV29100( ALL)01/95] Make sure the chains are the right size for
your tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.
Other types may damage your vehicle.
*[SV29200( ALL)01/95] Put the chains on tightly with the ends held
down securely. Verify that no chain touches
any wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
*[SV29300( ALL)01/95] Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub
or bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicle
and tighten the chains. If you continue to
hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage
to your vehicle.
*[SV29400( ALL)10/94] Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.
*[SV29500( ALL)05/94] Remove tire chains at the first opportunity
after using them on snow and ice. Do not use
the chains on dry roads.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
261
%*[SV29600( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels
*[SV29700( ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent you
use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use
acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,
fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil
remover to remove grease and tar.
*[SV29800( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if
the brushes are abrasive.
%*[SV30450( ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid
*[SV30475( ALL)01/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need to
check the fluid level of the transmission, since
your vehicle does not use up transmission fluid.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet for replacement intervals. However, if
the transmission is not working properly — for
instance, the transmission may slip or shift
slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid
leakage — the fluid level should be checked.
%*[SV30550( ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid
*[SV30560( ALL)02/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluid
level at normal operating temperature
150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately
20 miles (30 km) of driving. However, if
necessary, you can check the fluid level without
having to drive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain a
normal operating temperature if outside
temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).
[SV30575( ALL)03/94] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the
engine and, while fully applying the brake
pedal, move the transmission shift selector
through all of the gear ranges allowing sufficient
time for each position to engage. Securely latch
the transmission shift selector in the P (Park)
position, fully set the parking brake and leave
the engine running.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
262
[SV30625(MBC )03/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven if
the fluid level is below the low cold
reading on the dipstick.
*[SV30650( ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out
and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the
dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure
it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read
the fluid level.
[SV30675(MBC )03/93] When checking fluid at normal operating
temperature 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), the fluid
level should be within the hot notched area on
the dipstick. When the vehicle has not been
driven, and outside temperatures are above 68˚F
(20˚C), the fluid levels should be between the
hot notch and the tip of the dipstick.
*[SV30715( ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an
extended period at high speeds or in
city traffic during hot weather, or
pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to
allow the fluid to cool before checking.
%*[SV30725(M CGV)05/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid
[SV30750( ALL)03/94] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct
type will be used. Use only MERCONHfluid.
*[SV30775( ALL)03/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through
the filler tube to bring the level to the correct
area on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. If the
level is above the top hole on the dipstick,
excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
%*[SV30801( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
263
[SV30825(MBC )03/93]
one third page art:0011152-A
Detail of the automatic transmission dipstick
%*[SV31900( ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid
*[SV32000( ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle
should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,
expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall
as you put more mileage on your vehicle and
the brake lining wears.
[SV32200( BCGV)03/95] Check the brake fluid at each scheduled engine
oil change or at least once a year. You can do
this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic
reservoir on the master cylinder. Also, see label
on reservoir cap. (To locate the master cylinder,
see The Engine Types in the Index.) The fluid
level should be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
*[SV32350( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Brake fluid is toxic.
*[SV32375( ALL)05/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with
running water for 15 minutes. Get medical
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally,
drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical
attention immediately.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
264
*[SV32400( ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove
the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to
the MAX line with Ford High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA,
C6AZ-19542-BA, or equivalent DOT 3 fluid
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A.
*[SV33100( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
If you use a brake fluid that is not
DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage
to your brakes.
*[SV33200( ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.
[SV33500( BC )03/93]
one third page art:0010387-A
The brake system fluid reservoir
*[SV33700( ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low
— below the seam or ridge on the outside of the
plastic reservoir — have the brake system
inspected.
*[SV33750( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
Do not let the reservoir for the master
cylinder run dry. This may cause the
brakes to fail.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
265
[SV34725( BC )12/91]
half page art:0010487-B
The anti-lock brake system fluid reservoir
%*[SV34800( ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid
*[SV34900( ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid at
least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).
%*[SV35000( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power Steering
Fluid
[SV35050(MBC )03/95]
3.8L SFI engine
*[SV35100( ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the
power steering fluid reaches normal
operating temperature. The power steering
fluid will be at the right temperature when
the engine coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster is near the center of the
NORMAL operating temperature range.
*[SV35200( ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel back and forth several times. Make
sure that the cap assembly is installed at this
time.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
266
*[SV35300( ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.
%*[SV35400(MBC )03/94] 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which
is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The
fluid level should be between the arrows in
the FULL HOT range, which is marked on
the side of the dipstick, opposite the side
marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the
level is within the FULL HOT range.
*[SV35500(MBC )07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid
in small amounts, continuously checking the
level, until you reach the FULL HOT range.
Do not overfill.
*[SV35600(MBC )03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick back
in and make sure that it fits snugly.
[SV35700(MBC )12/94]
half page art:0010485-C
The dipstick for power steering fluid
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
267
[SV35850( BC )05/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford
Specification ESW-M2C33-F, such as Ford
Premium Power Steering Fluid, E6AZ-19582-AA
or is an equivalent Type F Automatic
Transmission Fluid with a Ford registration
number (an 8-digit number beginning with “2P”
printed on the fluid container).
*[SV35900( ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive
your vehicle for a long period of time before
adding fluid. This can damage the power
steering pump.
*[SV36100(MBC )02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it is
cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL
COLD range on the dipstick. The reading will
only be accurate if the fluid temperature is
approximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).
[SV36155(MBC )03/95]
4.6L SFI engine
[SV36170(MBC )03/95] 1. Check the fluid level when the system is
COLD (allow at least one half hour after
driving for the power steering fluid to cool).
[SV36176(MBC )03/95] 2. Locate the power steering reservoir mounted
to the front upper left-hand corner of the
engine.
[SV36178(MBC )03/95] 3. Visually verify that the fluid level is above
the MIN line adjacent to the reservoir “sight
window.”
[SV36182(MBC )03/95] 4. If the power steering fluid is below the MIN
line, remove the cap and add fluid in small
amounts until the level is between the MIN
and MAX lines.
[SV36185(MBC )03/95] 5. Reinstall the reservoir cap.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
268
[SV36190(MBC )03/95]
half page art:0011153-A
Fluid level for power steering
[SV36200( BC )05/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford’s
Specification ESW-M2C33-F, such as Ford
Premium Power Steering Fluid, E6AZ-19582-AA
or an equivalent Type F Automatic Transmission
Fluid with a Ford registration number (an 8-digit
number beginning with “2P” printed on the
fluid container).
*[SV36250(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If the power steering fluid is low, do
not drive your vehicle for a long
period of time before adding fluid.
This can damage the power steering
pump.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
269
% [SV36300(MBC )12/94] Fuses, High Current Fuses and
Circuit Breakers
*[SV36400( ALL)03/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and circuit
breakers protect your vehicle’s wiring system
from overloading. If electrical parts in your
vehicle are not working, the system may have
been overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped a
circuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any
electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses
(conventional and high current) or circuit
breakers.
*[SV36600( ALL)03/95] The following charts tell you which fuses or
circuit breakers protect the wiring for each
electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or
a circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts of
your vehicle that use that circuit will not work.
*[SV36610( ALL)01/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuit
breakers to check, follow the procedures under
Checking and replacing fuses or Checking and
replacing circuit breakers in this chapter.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
270
[SV36800( BC )07/93]
half page art:0010412-B
The instrument panel fuse panel location
[SV37300( BC )11/93]
half page art:0010413-C
The instrument panel fuse panel
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
271
%*[SV37500( ALL)02/95] The Instrument Panel Fuses, Circuit
Breakers and Relays
[SV37900( BC )09/94]
thirty-four pica chart:0010392-I
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
272
[SV38000( BC )01/94]
twelve pica chart:0010493-E
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
273
[SV38100(BC)05/95]
twenty-eightpicachart:0010391
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
274
%*[SV39000( ALL)01/95] High Current Fuses
*[SV39200( ALL)01/95] High current fuses are circuit protectors that are
part of the wiring harness for some electrical
equipment. These, like fuses, open when the
circuit load exceeds their amperage rating. High
current fuses may be purchased from your Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[SV39300(MBC )01/95] The high current fuse panel is located in the
engine compartment on the left-hand fender
apron.
*[SV39600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
*[SV39700( ALL)05/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses be
replaced by a qualified technician.
[SV39900( BC )03/93]
half page art:0011157-A
The high current fuse panel location
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
275
% [SV40100( ALL)06/93]
The high current fuse panel
[SV40400( BC )07/93]
full page art:0010428-E
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
276
[SV40600(ALL)06/93]
Thehighcurrentfusesandrelays
[SV41000(BC)05/95]
twenty-eightpicachart:0010429
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
277
%*[SV41210( ALL)03/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses
*[SV41215( ALL)02/95] If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:
[SV41225( BC )03/93] 1. Find the fuse panel underneath the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering
column.
[SV41245( BCGV)03/93] 2. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look
through the clear side of the fuse to see if
the metal wire inside is separated. If it is,
the fuse should be replaced.
[SV41550( ALL)05/92]
quarter page art:0010416-A
The side view of a fuse
[SV41700( BC )04/89] 3. Replace the fuse with one that has the right
amperage rating. (See the following chart.)
To remove the fuse use the pulling tool
attached to the inside cover of the fuse
panel. There are also four spare fuses
attached to the cover.
[SV41900( ALL)05/95]
eight pica chart:0001092-B
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
278
[SV41920( BC )09/93]
eight pica chart:0011219-A
*[SV42500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has
the specified amperage rating. Using a
fuse with a higher amperage rating can
cause severe wire damage and could start
a fire.
[SV42600( BC )11/89] 4. Close the cover.
*[SV42800( ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to
blow if you do not find what caused the
overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have
your electrical system checked.
%*[SV42900( ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers
*[SV43000( ALL)01/95] If you need to check a circuit breaker that is on
the fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses in
this chapter to find out how to locate the fuse
panel.
[SV43200( ALL)12/94] Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow
the electrical parts to work again once the
overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit
breakers continue to cut off electricity, have your
vehicle’s electrical system checked.
*[SV43250( ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuit
breakers. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
279
*[SV43300( ALL)02/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the
same amperage rating. To remove a circuit
breaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it with
your finger and thumb and pull it straight out
of its socket.
%*[SV44400( ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement
*[SV44500( ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of the
following lights frequently:
*[SV44600( ALL)01/95] headlamps
*[SV44700( ALL)01/95] tail lamps
*[SV44800( ALL)01/95] brakelamps
*[SV44900( ALL)01/95] hazard flasher
*[SV44950( ALL)02/95] high-mount brakelamp
*[SV45000( ALL)01/95] turn signals
*[SV45200( ALL)01/95] license plate lamp
%*[SV45600( ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should be
checked if:
*[SV45700( ALL)01/95] oncoming motorists frequently signal you to
turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you
do not have the high beams on
*[SV45800( ALL)01/95] the headlamps do not seem to give you
enough light to see clearly at night
*[SV45900( ALL)01/95] the headlamp beams are pointed substantially
away from a position slightly down and to
the right
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
280
%*[SV46000( ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb
*[SV46100( ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable
bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace
the bulb, rather than the whole lamp.
*[SV46200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully
and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp
the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the
next time the headlamps are operated.
*[SV46300( ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you
can immediately replace it with a new one. If a
bulb is removed for an extended period of time,
contaminants may enter the headlamp housing
and affect its performance.
[SV46400( BC )07/93]
half page art:0010431-A
Parts of a headlamp
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
281
*[SV46600( ALL)03/95]
Removing the headlamp bulb
*[SV46700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is in
the OFF position.
*[SV46800( BC )02/95] 2. Lift the hood and find the bulb in the
headlamp socket.
*[SV46900( BC )01/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector from the
bulb by grasping the wire with a quick pull
rearward.
*[SV47100( BC )01/95] 4. Remove the retaining ring by turning it 1/8
of a turn to free it from the socket. Then
slide the ring off the plastic base. Keep the
ring. You must use it again to hold the new
bulb in place.
*[SV47400( ALL)03/95]
Installing the headlamp bulb
*[SV47600(MBC )02/95] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base
facing upward, insert the glass end of the
bulb into the socket. You may need to turn
the bulb left or right to line up the grooves
in the plastic base with the tabs in the
socket. When the grooves are aligned, push
the bulb into the socket until the plastic base
contacts the rear of the socket.
*[SV47800(MBC )02/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic
base until it contacts the rear of the socket.
Lock the ring into the socket by rotating it
clockwise until you feel a “stop”.
*[SV47900( ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of
the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into
position.
*[SV48000(MBC )02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that
they work properly. If the headlamp was
correctly aligned before you changed the
bulb, you should not need to align it again.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
282
%*[SV48370( BCGV)02/95] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulbs
[SV48380( BCGV)06/94] Your vehicle has a brakelamp mounted in the
rear window, called a high-mount brakelamp.
You may need to remove this lamp at times to
replace the brakelamp bulb or to clean the rear
window.
[SV48600( C )03/92]
half page art:0010435-A
Parts of the high-mount brakelamp
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
283
% [SV48900( BCGV)06/94] To remove the high-mount brakelamp:
[SV49200( BC )01/89] 1. Slide the trim cover toward the front of the
vehicle to disengage the retaining clips.
[SV49500( BC )01/89] 2. Twist the socket counterclockwise and
remove from lamp.
[SV50015( BC )03/91] 3. Pull bulb out of socket.
[SV50100( BC )01/89] 4. Remove the retaining screw.
[SV50200( BC )01/89] 5. Lift the lamp above the carpet and slide
away from the rear window.
[SV50260( BC )05/94] 6. Replace the burned out bulbs.
*[SV50300( BCGV)02/95] To install the high-mount brakelamp:
[SV50400( BC )01/89] 1. Slide the lamp into slots, toward the rear
window.
[SV50700( BC )01/89] 2. Install the screw.
[SV51000( BC )01/89] 3. Push bulb into the socket.
[SV51300( BC )01/89] 4. Install the bulb and socket into the lamp and
twist socket clockwise until it locks.
[SV51500( BC )01/89] 5. Slide the trim cover toward rear of vehicle
to engage the retaining clips.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
284
%*[SV51600( ALL)10/92] Using the Right Bulbs
[SV51900( BC )03/95]
thirty-four pica chart:0010440-H
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
285
%*[SV52400( ALL)03/95] Emission Control System
*[SV52500( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter which enables your vehicle to comply
with applicable exhaust emission requirements.
*[SV52550( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes into
the passenger compartment. Under
extreme conditions excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the fuel
system, the interior floor covering, or
other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
*[SV52600( ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the
other emission control parts continue to work
properly:
*[SV52700( ALL)01/95] Use only unleaded fuel.
*[SV52800( ALL)01/95] Avoid running out of fuel.
*[SV52900( ALL)01/95] Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.
*[SV52950( ALL)01/95] Do not push start your vehicle.
*[SV53000( ALL)03/95] Have the services listed in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet performed
according to the specified schedule. The
scheduled maintenance services are required
because they are considered essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to
its emissions system.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
286
*[SV53075( ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or service
of the emissions control devices or systems in
your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or
engine may be performed at your expense by
any automotive repair establishment or
individual using automotive parts equivalent to
those which your vehicle or engine was
originally equipped.
*[SV53150( ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine
Ford replacement parts. If other than Ford or
Motorcraft parts or Ford authorized
remanufactured parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for the service of components
affecting emissions control, such non-Ford parts
should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor
Company parts in performance and durability. It
is the owner’s responsibility to determine the
equivalency of such parts. Please consult your
warranty booklet for complete warranty
information.
*[SV53175( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
*[SV53200( ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss
of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the
check engine light, or the temperature warning
light. These sometimes indicate that the emission
system is not working properly.
*[SV53300( ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your
vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more
unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can
increase the temperature of the engine or
exhaust system.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
287
*[SV53400( ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,
services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or
supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device
or prevent it from working. In some of the
United States and in Canada, vehicle owners
may be liable if their emission control device is
removed or is prevented from working.
*[SV53500( ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when you
service your vehicle. If the metal collector
contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or
bumper parts they could melt or deform.
*[SV53600( ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate
properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on
for more than five seconds after you shut it off
or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.
%*[SV53700( ALL)02/95] Information about your vehicle’s emission
control system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement
and gives some tune-up specifications.
%*[SV53702( ALL)05/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
Testing
*[SV53715( ALL)05/95] In some localities it may become a legal
requirement to pass an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the
vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has
just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to
a not ready for I/M testing condition. To
prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a
“need for additional mixed city and highway
driving to complete the check” of the OBD II
system. As soon as all of the OBD II system
checks are successfully completed, the OBD II
system is set to the ready condition. The amount
of driving required to reach the ready condition
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
288
varies with individual driving patterns. To
complete this requirement in the minimum
amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle
defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or
does not want to do the additional driving
required by law, a service center can perform
this drive cycle as it would any other type of
repair work.
*[SV53717( ALL)05/95] OBD II Drive Cycle
[SV53730( ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the order
shown. If steps 2 thru 9 are interrupted, repeat
the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps.
*[SV53735( ALL)03/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according
to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
*[SV53740( ALL)05/95] The engine must be warmed up and at
operating temperature before proceeding with
the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive
Cycle.
*[SV53745( ALL)05/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)
the vehicle for 4 minutes.
*[SV53747( BCGV)05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
*[SV53752( BCGV)05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h)
at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.
*[SV53757( BCGV)05/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at
45 mph (72 km/h) for 30 seconds.
*[SV53763( BCGV)05/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
289
*[SV53768( BCGV)05/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at
speeds between 25 and 40 mph
(40-64 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15
minute drive cycle the following modes must
be achieved:
*[SV53772( ALL)05/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10
seconds each
*[SV53775( ALL)05/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2
throttle position, and
*[SV53777( ALL)05/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5
minute steady state throttle drives.
*[SV53780( BCGV)05/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and
60 mph (72-97 km/h). This should take
approximately 5 minutes.
*[SV53784( BCGV)05/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at
the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
*[SV53788( BCGV)05/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying
speeds between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h).
*[SV53792( BCGV)05/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive
for 40 seconds.
*[SV53796( ALL)05/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.
Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
290
*[SV53800( ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,
and Lubricant Specifications
%*[SV53900( ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities
[SV54200( BC )05/95]
twenty-two pica chart:0010447-M
*[SV54550( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be
replaced every 100,000 miles
(160,000 km) or if the axle has been
submerged in water. Otherwise, the
lube should not be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair
required.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
291
*[SV54600( ALL)01/95] Motorcraft Parts
[SV54850( BC )03/95]
fourteen pica chart:0010452-M
[SV55000( ALL)09/94] If a spark plug is removed for examination, it
must be reinstalled in the same cylinder.
[SV55025(MBC )05/94]
For 3.8L engines:
[SV55050(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3 have an EG suffix.
[SV55075(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #4, #5, #6 have an E suffix.
[SV55100( ALL)05/95]
For 4.6L (2V) engines:
[SV55125( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3, #4 have a PG suffix.
[SV55150( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #5, #6, #7, #8 have a P suffix.
[SV55200( ALL)03/95] If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only
spark plugs with the service number suffix letter
as shown on the engine decal.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
292
%*[SV55300(ALL)03/95] LubricantSpecifications
[SV55800(BC)03/95]
twenty-eightpicachart:0010584
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
293
[SV55900( BC )03/95]
fourteen pica chart:0010585-K
*[SV56400( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be
replaced every 100,000 miles
(160,000 km) or if the axle has been
submerged in water. Otherwise, the
lube should not be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair
required.
%*[SV57000( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage
*[SV57100( ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips
*[SV57150( ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for an
extended period of time (60 days or more), refer
to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
*[SV57200( ALL)01/95]
General
*[SV57300( ALL)01/95] Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
*[SV57400( ALL)01/95] Protect from sunlight, if possible.
*[SV57500( ALL)01/95] If vehicles are stored outside, they require
regular maintenance to protect against rust
and damage.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
294
*[SV57600( ALL)01/95]
Body
*[SV57700( ALL)01/95] Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,
grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,
rear wheel housing and underside of front
fenders.
*[SV57800( ALL)01/95] Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed
locations.
*[SV57900( ALL)01/95] Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent
rust.
*[SV58000( ALL)01/95] Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a
thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the
vehicle is washed.
*[SV58100( ALL)04/95] Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges
and latches with a light grade oil.
*[SV58200( ALL)01/95] Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.
*[SV58300( ALL)01/95] Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
%*[SV58350( ALL)01/95]
Engine
*[SV58400( ALL)01/95] Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle
until it reaches normal operating temperature.
*[SV58500( ALL)01/95] With your foot on the brake, shift through all
the gears while the engine is running.
%*[SV58600( ALL)01/95]
Fuel system
*[SV58700( ALL)07/94] Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
*[SV58900( ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle
storage (60 days or more), fuel may
deteriorate due to oxidation. This can
damage rubber and other polymers in
the fuel system and may also clog
small orifices.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
295
*[SV59000( ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever
actual or expected storage periods exceed 60
days. Follow the instructions on the label. The
vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to
circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
%*[SV59200( ALL)01/95]
Cooling system
*[SV59300( ALL)01/95] Protect against freezing temperatures.
%*[SV59400( ALL)01/95]
Battery
*[SV59500( ALL)01/95] Check and recharge as necessary.
*[SV59600( ALL)01/95] Keep connections clean and covered with a
light coat of grease.
*[SV59650( ALL)03/95] If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, it may be
advisable to disconnect the battery cables to
ensure battery charge is maintained for quick
starting.
[SV59675( ALL)05/94] NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, it
will be necessary to reset memory
features.
%*[SV59700( ALL)01/95]
Brakes
*[SV59800( ALL)01/95] Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully
released.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
296
%*[SV59900( ALL)01/95]
Tires
*[SV60000( ALL)05/95] Maintain recommended air pressure.
*[SV60100( ALL)01/95]
Miscellaneous
*[SV60200( ALL)01/95] Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
clevis pins under vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
*[SV60300( ALL)03/95] Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15
days to lubricate working parts and prevent
corrosion.
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
297
File:rcsvc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:45:15 1995
303
[QI01350( BC )06/93]
full page art:0011379-A
Label Locations
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
304
[QI01500( C )05/95]
full page art:0011109-C
Front Exterior View
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
305
[QI01700( C )05/95]
full page art:0011111-C
Rear Exterior View
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
306
[QI01900( C )03/95]
full page art:0011113-C
Entrance View
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
307
[QI02100( C )05/95]
full page art:0011115-C
Driver’s Door
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
308
[QI02300( C )05/95]
full page art:0011117-C
Instrument Panel
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
309
[QI02600( C )05/95]
full page art:0011120-C
Instrument Cluster
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
310
[QI02800( C )05/95]
full page art:0011122-D
Trunk
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
311
[QI02905( C )05/95]
full page art:0011213-C
3.8L Engine Compartment
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
312
[QI03100( C )05/95]
full page art:0011347-A
4.6L Engine Compartment
File:rcqic.ex
Update:Tue May 21 08:06:38 1996
Index 313
Index
A
ABS warning light
(see Anti-lock brake system) ....... 58
Accessory position on the ignition ..... 45
Additives, engine oil .......... 241
Air bag supplemental restraint system
description ............... 18
disposal ................ 25
driver air bag ............. 18
indicator light ............. 60
operation ............... 21
proper seating ............. 19
tone generator ............. 25
wearing safety belts........... 18
Air cleaner filter, location ........ 231
Air conditioning
manual heating and air
conditioning system ......... 74
semi-automatic temperature
control system ............ 77
Alarm, activating remote personal .... 112
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ...... 244
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description .............. 174
see also Brake ............ 173
warning light.............. 58
Anti-theft lug nuts and key ....... 202
Anti-theft system
arming the system .......... 106
description .............. 104
disarming an untriggered system.... 108
disarming a triggered system ..... 109
triggering .............. 108
Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 205
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
314 Index
Audio system
(see Electronic sound system) ..... 131
Autolamp system (see Headlamps) .....84
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic overdrive..... 165
fluid, adding ............. 262
fluid, checking ............ 261
fluid, refill capacities ......... 290
fluid, specifications .......... 292
Axle, traction lok ............ 170
B
Backing up ............... 167
Basic vehicle warranty ........... 3
Battery
acid, treating emergencies ....... 187
charging system warning light ......60
disconnecting ............. 252
how to service ............ 251
jumping a disabled battery....... 187
maintenance-free ........... 251
proper disposal, recycling ....... 252
replacement, specifications ....... 291
voltage gauge..............69
when storing your vehicle ....... 295
Brake fluid
brake warning light ...........57
specifications ............. 292
Brakelamp
bulb replacement ........... 284
high-mount brakelamp ........ 282
Brakes
adjustment .............. 173
anti-lock ............... 174
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light.............58
applying the brakes .......... 173
brake warning light ...........57
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 315
fluid, checking and adding ...... 263
fluid, refill capacities ......... 290
fluid, specifications .......... 292
front disc .............. 173
new brake linings............ 4
noise ................ 174
parking ............... 175
trailer ................ 184
when storing your vehicle ....... 295
Brake-shift interlock ........... 166
Break-in period .............. 4
Bulbs, replacing
headlamps .............. 280
specifications ............. 284
C
Canada, customer assistance ....... 214
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP) ........... 214
Capacities for refilling fluids ....... 290
Carbon monoxide in exhaust........ 51
Car seats for children
(see Child safety seats) ......... 27
Cassette tape player (see Electronic
sound system) .......... 141, 150
Catalytic converter ........... 285
CD player (see Electronic sound system) . 131
Chains, tires .............. 260
Changing a tire ............. 193
Charging system gauge .......... 69
Charging system warning light....... 60
Child safety restraints ........... 25
child safety belts ............ 43
child safety seats ............ 27
Child safety seats
and air bags ............ 20,27
automatic locking mode (retractor) .... 29
in front seat .............. 29
in rear outboard seat .......... 35
in rear seat............... 42
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
316 Index
Chime
key in ignition .............46
safety belt ...............59
Circuit breakers
checking and replacing ........ 278
see also fuses ............. 269
Cleaning your vehicle
chrome and aluminum parts ....... 6
engine compartment.......... 234
exterior ................ 5
exterior lamps .............84
fabric ................ 123
headlamps ...............84
instrument panel ............74
instrument panel lens ..........90
interior lamps..............89
mirrors................ 124
plastic parts .............. 6
polishing ................ 6
rustproofing .............. 6
safety belts ...............18
tail lamps ...............84
upholstery and interior trim ...... 123
washing ................ 5
wheels ................ 261
Climate control system
air conditioning........... 74,77
heating............... 74,77
Clock...................89
Cold engine starting ............48
Compact disc radio
(see Electronic sound system) ..... 132
Console, description ........... 127
Coolant (see Engine coolant)
checking and adding ......... 244
drain and flush ............ 248
preparing for storage ......... 295
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 317
Coolant (see Engine coolant) (continued)
proper solution............ 246
refill capacities ............ 290
refill procedure............ 248
specifications ............. 292
temperature gauge ........... 66
Cooling fan............... 228
Cruise control (see Speed control) ..... 97
Customer Assistance Center,
Ford (U.S.) .............. 208
Customer Assistance Centre,
Ford of Canada............ 208
D
Dashboard (see Instrument panel) ..... 73
Daytime running light system ....... 82
Defrost
rear window .............. 81
windshield ............. 75,79
Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid. . . 262
Dispute Settlement Board ........ 209
Doors
door ajar warning light ......... 71
lubricant specifications ........ 292
Driving under special conditions
bad weather ............. 177
heavy load.............. 179
high water .............. 178
slippery roads ............ 177
towing a trailer............ 181
E
Electrical system
circuit breakers ............ 278
fuses ................ 269
operating when the engine is off ..... 45
Electronic sound system
radio reception ............ 161
tuning the radio ......... 133, 152
warranty and service information . . . 164
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
318 Index
Electronic stereo cassette radio
(see Electronic sound system) ..... 142
Emergencies, roadside
assistance............... 205
battery acid spills ........... 187
jump-starting ............. 187
towing ................ 203
Emergency brake (parking brake) ..... 175
Emission control system, catalytic
converter............... 285
Engine
check engine warning light .......63
does not start..............49
fuel injected engine, starting .......47
fuel pump shut-off switch ........53
preparing to start ............47
service points............. 231
starting.................48
starting after a collision .........53
storing your vehicle .......... 294
Engine block heater ............50
Engine coolant
checking and adding ......... 244
checking hoses ............ 245
disposal ............... 248
low coolant warning light ........72
preparing for storage ......... 295
proper solution ............ 246
recovery reservoir........... 244
refill capacities ............ 290
specifications ............. 292
Engine coolant temperature gauge
description ...............66
mechanical ...............66
Engine fan ............... 228
Engine oil
changing oil and oil filter ....... 243
checking and adding ......... 241
dipstick ............... 241
disposal ............... 243
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 319
Engine oil (continued)
engine oil pressure gauge ........ 69
filter, specifications .......... 291
refill capacities ............ 290
specifications ............. 292
synthetic oil ............. 241
“break-in” oils ............. 5
viscosity ............... 241
Entry system
illuminated.............. 103
remote................ 110
Exhaust fumes .............. 51
Extended Service Plan, Ford ........ 4
F
Federal Communications Commission. . . 163
Flashers, hazard.............. 94
Flashing the lights............. 92
Flat tire ................ 193
Floor mats ............... 129
Fluid refill capacities .......... 290
Ford Customer Assistance Center..... 208
Ford Dispute Settlement Board ...... 209
Ford Extended Service Plan ........ 4
Ford Motor Company of Canada ..... 214
Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance Centre........... 214
Foreign registration ........... 215
French owner guides, how to obtain .... 3
Fuel
capacity ............... 290
filling your vehicle with fuel...... 234
filter, specifications .......... 291
fuel gauge ............... 65
low fuel warning light ......... 72
storing your vehicle.......... 294
Fuel cap, removing ........... 234
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
320 Index
Fuel filter, specifications ......... 291
Fuel gauge ................65
Fuel pump shut-off switch, starting after a
collision ................53
Fuse panels
engine compartment.......... 274
high current fuse panel ........ 275
instrument panel ........... 269
Fuses
charts ................ 271
checking and replacing ........ 277
circuit breakers ............ 278
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) .......... 234
Gasoline (see Fuel)............ 235
Gauges, Mechanical
engine coolant temperature gauge ....66
engine oil pressure gauge ........69
fuel gauge ...............65
multi-gauge ..............62
odometer................67
speedometer ..............67
tachometer ...............68
trip odometer..............68
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
calculating .............. 180
definition............... 179
location ............... 179
Gearshift
automatic operation .......... 165
console-mounted........... 167
positions ............... 165
shift-lock ............... 166
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 321
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
calculating .............. 180
definition .............. 179
location ............... 179
H
Hazard flashers .............. 94
Headlamps
autolamp system ............ 84
bulb specification ........... 284
checking alignment .......... 279
cleaning ................ 84
daytime running lights ......... 82
flashing ................ 92
high beam ............... 92
replacing bulbs ............ 279
turning on and off ........... 83
Head restraints ............. 118
Heating
manual heating and air conditioning
system ............... 74
semi-automatic system ......... 77
High beams, indicator light ........ 62
High-mount brakelamp
description .............. 282
replacing the bulb .......... 283
Hitch ................. 183
Hood
latch location............. 230
lubrication specifications........ 292
release lever ............. 230
Horn................... 95
Hoses, checking............. 245
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
322 Index
I
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 208
Idle
relearning .............. 252
speed .................49
Ignition
chime .................46
positions of the ignition .........45
removing the key ............46
Indicator lamp module...........71
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ........27
Instrument cluster, mechanical .......56
Instrument panel
cleaning ................90
lighting up panel and interior ......86
location of components .........73
Interval wipers ..............93
J
Jack
operation............... 197
positioning .............. 199
Jump-starting your vehicle
attaching cables ............ 189
disconnecting cables.......... 192
K
Keys
key in ignition chime ..........46
positions of the ignition .........45
removing from the ignition .......46
stuck in lock position ..........46
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 323
L
Lamps
bulb replacement specifications chart . . 284
checking ............... 279
courtesy lamps ............. 89
daytime running light system ...... 82
dome lamps .............. 88
flashing the lamps ........... 92
hazard flashers ............. 94
headlamps ............... 83
high beams .............. 92
high-mount brakelamp ........ 282
illuminated entry system ....... 103
illuminated mirrors .......... 126
interior lamps ............. 86
map lamps............... 88
replacing bulbs ............ 279
trailer ................ 184
Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . 91
Lap belts ................. 16
Lights, warning and indicator
airbag................. 60
anti-lock brakes (ABS).......... 58
brake ................. 57
charging system ............ 60
check engine .............. 63
check gauges.............. 62
door ajar................ 71
high beam ............... 62
low coolant .............. 72
low fuel .............. 62,72
low washer fluid ............ 72
overdrive off .............. 61
safety belt ............... 59
turn signal indicator .......... 65
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
324 Index
Load limits
GAWR................ 179
GVWR ................ 179
trailer towing............. 181
Lubricant specifications ......... 292
Luggage compartment .......... 128
Lug nuts
anti-theft ............... 202
tightening sequence .......... 200
M
Maintenance (see Servicing) ....... 227
Map pockets .............. 127
Master cylinder, brakes ......... 263
Mirrors
rearview ............... 124
side view mirrors (power) ....... 124
vanity mirror, illuminated ....... 126
Moon roof ............... 115
Motorcraft parts............. 291
N
National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration ......... 213
O
Odometer
description ...............67
trip odometer..............68
Oil filter ................ 291
Oil (see Engine oil) ........... 240
Oil viscosity .............. 241
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 287
Overdrive................ 168
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 325
P
Panic alarm feature,
remote entry system ......... 112
Parking brake
operation .............. 175
warning light.............. 57
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) ....... 291
PCV valve, specifications ........ 291
Phone, cellular .............. 90
Power distribution box (see Fuses) .... 269
Power door locks ............ 101
Power features
door locks .............. 102
mirrors ............... 124
moon roof .............. 115
seats................. 121
windows............... 114
Power steering
dipstick ............... 266
driving with power steering ...... 173
fluid, checking and adding ...... 265
fluid, refill capacity .......... 290
fluid, specifications .......... 292
R
Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 131
Rear window, defroster .......... 81
Refill capacities for fluids ........ 290
Relays ................. 269
Remote control, trunk .......... 128
Remote entry system
locking/unlocking doors ....... 111
opening the trunk .......... 111
panic alarm ............. 112
replacement/additional transmitters . . 113
replacing the batteries......... 112
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
326 Index
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)
adult.................. 7
child..................25
head ................. 118
infant .................25
Roadside assistance ........... 205
Roadside emergencies .......... 187
Rotating the tires ............ 256
S
Safe driving tips............. 177
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ...... 7
Safety chains, when towing a trailer.... 183
Safety defects, reporting ......... 213
Safety restraints
adjusting the safety belts..... 10,12,16
automatic locking mode (retractor) ....10
center rear lap belt ...........16
cleaning the safety belts .........18
extension assembly ...........17
for children...............25
for infants ...............25
for pregnant women...........14
replacement ..............17
warning light and chime.........59
Safety seats for children
and air bags ..............20
attaching with tether straps .......27
automatic locking mode (retractor) ....29
in center seating positions ........42
in front seat ..............29
in rear outboard ............35
tether anchorage hardware........27
Seats
adjusting the seat, manual ....... 118
adjusting the seats, power ....... 121
child safety seats ............27
cleaning upholstery .......... 123
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 327
Seats (continued)
head restraints ............ 118
rear seat access ............ 123
reclining the seat ........... 120
sport seat .............. 122
Serial number (VIN)........... 208
Service concerns ............ 207
Servicing your vehicle, precautions when
servicing............... 228
Shift-lock system ............ 166
Side mirrors, adjusting.......... 124
Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) .... 115
Snow tires and chains .......... 260
Spare tire
changing the tire ........... 196
finding the spare ........... 195
removing the spare tire ........ 195
temporary spare ........... 193
Spark plugs, specifications ........ 291
Specification chart, lubricants....... 292
Speed control
accelerating .............. 99
canceling a set speed ......... 100
resetting ................ 99
resuming a set speed ......... 100
turning off .............. 100
when towing a trailer ......... 185
Speedometer ............... 67
Starting your vehicle
preparing to start your vehicle...... 47
starting a cold engine .......... 48
starting after a collision ......... 53
starting a warm engine ......... 48
Steering, power ............. 173
Steering wheel
horn.................. 95
locking ................ 45
speed controls ............. 97
tilting ................. 96
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
328 Index
Storage compartments
center console............. 127
map pockets ............. 127
Storing your vehicle ........... 293
Sun visor ................ 126
Supplemental air bag readiness light ....60
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....18
T
Tachometer ................68
Tail lamps
bulb replacement ........... 284
cleaning ................84
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ..........74
Tether anchor installation
(see Child restraints) ..........27
Tilt steering wheel.............96
Tires
changing ............... 193
checking the pressure ......... 255
cleaning ............... 261
replacing ............... 257
rotating ............... 256
snow tires and chains ......... 260
storing your vehicle .......... 296
tire grades .............. 258
treadwear .............. 258
wear bands.............. 257
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 181
Towing your vehicle, with a tow truck . . 203
Traction assist.............. 171
Traction-lok rear axle .......... 170
Trailer towing
calculating maximum trailer weight. . . 182
safety chains ............. 183
tips ................. 185
trailer brakes ............. 184
trailer lamps ............. 184
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
Index 329
Transmission
automatic operation.......... 165
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) ............ 261
fluid, refill capacities ......... 290
lubricant specifications ........ 292
Transmission control switch ....... 168
Transmitter (see Remote entry) ...... 110
Trip odometer .............. 68
Trunk
remote release lever.......... 128
using the keys to open ........ 128
using the remote entry system
to open .............. 111
Tune-up specifications (VECI) ...... 287
Turn signal
indicator lights ............. 65
lever ................. 91
U
Used engine oil, disposal ........ 243
V
Vanity mirror.............. 126
Variable interval wipers .......... 93
VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)
decal ................ 287
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 208
Vehicle loading
automatic transmissions ........ 179
calculating the load .......... 180
Vehicle storage ............. 293
Ventilating your vehicle
(see Climate control) ........ 76,80
Viscosity (see Engine oil) ........ 241
Visor (see Sun visor) .......... 126
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
330 Index
W
Warm engine, starting ...........48
Warning chimes
key in ignition .............46
safety belt ...............59
Warranties, radio ............ 164
Warranty Information Booklet ....... 3
Washer fluid
reservoir ............... 253
warning light ..............72
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) ...... 179
Wheels
anti-theft lugnuts ........... 202
cleaning ............... 261
covers ................ 201
inspection and maintenance ...... 255
ornaments .............. 200
Windows
power windows, operating....... 114
rear, defrosting .............81
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid ....... 253
checking and replacing wiper blades . . 254
low washer fluid light..........72
operation................92
reservoir ............... 253
specifications ............. 253
File:rcixc.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:52:09 1995
332
Service Station
Information
[GS00200( BC )05/95]
eighteen pica chart:0011186-E
File:rcgsc.ex
Update:Mon Jun 12 16:42:31 1995

Navigation menu